Home
Lenoxx Electronics PH-543 Telephone User Manual
Contents
1. 62 Additional printer setup 63 Setting the outgoing fax name and number To have the designated fax name and fax number printed on outgoing faxes 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Settings Click Fax Settings Click Analog Fax Setup Click inside the Station Name box and then enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes Click inside the Station Number box and then enter the printer fax number vn Oo WwW A VU N Click Submit Setting the date and time You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send If there is a power failure then you may have to reset the date and time To set the date and time 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Links amp Index 3 Click Set Date and Time 4 Click inside the Manually Set Date amp Time box and then enter the current date and time 5 Click Submit Turning Daylight Saving Time on The printer can be set to automatically adjust for Daylight Saving Time DST 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know
2. T1 fuser T2 fuser Ordering an ADF maintenance kit The ADF maintenance kit contains all the items necessary to replace the ADF pick mechanism and the ADF separator roller See the following table for the maintenance kit part number for your specific printer Part number ADF Maintenance kit 40X4769 Ordering a transfer roller When toner smudges appear on the front or back of printed pages order a replacement transfer roller Part number Transfer roll assembly 40X1886 Ordering charge rolls When toner fog or background shading appears on printed pages order replacement charge rolls Part number Charge roll assembly 40X5852 Ordering pick rollers When the paper fails to properly feed from the tray order new pick rollers Part number Pick rollers 40X4308 Ordering ADF replacement parts Order ADF replacement parts if you experience problems with paper double feeding or failing to feed through the automatic document feeder Maintaining the printer 249 Part name Part number ADF pick assembly 3017345 ADF separator roll 3017348 Ordering staple cartridges When Staples Lowor Staples Empty appears order the specified staple cartridge For more information see the illustrations inside the stapler door Part name Part number Staple Cartridges 3 pack 25A0013 Recycling Lexmark products To return Lexmark products for recycling 1 Go to www
3. Continue Touch this button when more changes need to be made for a job or after clearing a paper jam Cancel Select e Cancels an action or a selection e Cancels out of a screen and returns to the previous screen Selects a menu or menu item Learning about the printer Features Menu trail line Menus gt Settings gt Copy Settings gt Number of Copies Attendance message alert 19 Description A Menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen This feature acts as a trail showing the path taken to arrive at the current menu It gives the exact location within the menus Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu or menu item The Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current screen If you touch an underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number of Copies is set and saved then the selection is not saved and it does not become the user default setting If an attendance message occurs which closes a function such as copy or fax then a solid red dot appears over the function button on the home screen This indicates that an attendance message exists Additional printer setup 20 Additional printer setup Installing internal options CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and u
4. Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface Loading paper and specialty media 73 e Hold transparencies by the edges and then fan them Straighten the edges on a level surface Note Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies Be careful not to scratch them e Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Straighten the edges on a level surface 5 Load the paper or specialty media Note Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop Without an optional StapleSmart Finisher With an optional StapleSmart Finisher AN Duplex two sided printing Duplex two sided printing Loading paper and specialty media 74 Notes Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper under the stack height limiter e Do not load or close a tray while a job is printing Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time e Load envelopes with the flap side down Warning Potential Damage Never use envelopes with stamps clasps snaps windows coated linings or self stick adhesives These envelopes may severely damage the printer 6 Adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the paper stack Note Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder lies
5. Touch Finish job without further scanning if page jam recovery is active The job ends at the last successfully scanned page but the job is not canceled Successfully scanned pages go to their destination copy fax e mail or FTP Touch Restart job if job recovery is active and you are able to restart the job The message clears A new scan job containing the same parameters as the previous job starts 293 02 Flatbed Cover Open Close the scanner cover 840 01 Scanner Disabled This message indicates that the scanner has been disabled by the system support person 841 846 Scanner Service Error 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Check all cable connections 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer back on If the service message appears again then contact Customer Support and report the message 900 999 Service lt message gt 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Check all cable connections 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer back on If the service message appears again contact Customer Support and report the message Understanding printer messages 241 1565 Emulation error load emulation option The printer automatically clears the message in 30 seconds and then disables the download emulator on the firmware card To fix this download the correct downlo
6. Off Sharpness Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image 0 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Menu item Description Format Specifies the format of the file PDF pdf Secure PDF TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps PDF Version Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned to USB 1 2 1 6 Note 1 5 is the factory default setting Content Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to USB Text Photo Notes Photograph Text e Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art Photograph is used when the document is a high quality photograph or inkjet print e Text is used when the document is mostly text Color Specifies whether job prints in grayscale or color Gray Note Gray is the factory default setting Color a S 0 Understanding printer menus 206 Menu item Description Resolution Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned 75 Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting 150 200 300 400 600 Darkness Lightens or darkens the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Original Size Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Letter Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default Legal setting Executive Folio
7. The printer is connected to the network Understanding printer messages 228 Network indicates that the printer is using the standard network port built into the printer system board Network lt x gt indicates that an internal print server is installed inside the printer or that the printer is connected to an external print server No analog phone line connected to modem fax is disabled The printer is not detecting an analog phone line so the fax is disabled Connect the printer to an analog phone line No answer A fax number is dialed but no connection is made Wait for the message to clear No dial tone The printer does not have a dial tone Wait for the message to clear Queued for sending The scanning process of a fax job completed but the job is not sent yet because another fax job is being sent or received Wait for the message to clear Ready The printer is ready to receive print jobs Reattach bin lt x gt Try one or more of the following Turn the printer off and then back on If the error occurs a second time 1 Turn the printer off Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Remove the specified bin Reattach the bin uu A WU N Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 6 Restart the printer If the error occurs again 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the specified bin 4 Contact Customer Support e Touch Continue to cl
8. 143 A number of menus are available to make it easy for you to change printer settings To access the menus touch on the home screen Paper Menu Default Source Paper Size Type Configure MP Envelope Enhance Substitute Size Paper Texture Paper Weight Paper Loading Custom Types Custom Names Custom Scan Sizes Custom Bin Names Universal Setup Bin Setup 1 Only appears if a wireless card is installed Reports Menu Settings Page Device Statistics Network Setup Page Network lt x gt Setup Page Wireless Setup Paget Shortcut List Fax Job Log Fax Call Log Copy Shortcuts E mail Shortcuts Fax Shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Profiles List NetWare Setup Page Print Fonts Print Directory Asset Report Network Ports Active NIC Standard Network SMTP Setup Standard USB Parallel lt x gt Serial lt x gt 2 Depending on the printer setup this menu item appears as Standard Network or Network lt x gt Security Edit Security Setups Miscellaneous Security Settings Confidential Print Disc Wiping Security Audit Log Set Date and Time Settings General Settings Copy Settings Fax Settings E mail Settings FTP Settings Flash Drive Menu Print Settings Help Print all guides Copy guide E mail guide Fax guide FTP guide Information guide Print Defects guide Supplies Guide Understanding printer menus 144 Paper menu Default Source menu Menu item Description Default Source Sets
9. 5 6 99 Touch Off if you do not want your copies collated Touch Copy It Placing separator sheets between copies 1 u A U N Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Copy Touch Options Touch Separator Sheets Note Collate must be On for the separator sheets to be placed between copies If Collate is Off the separator sheets are added to the end of the print job Select one of the following Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Touch Done Touch Copy It Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet In order to save paper you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple page document onto a single sheet of paper Notes e The Paper Size must be set to Letter Legal A4 or B5 JIS The Copy Size must be set to 100 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass vn OO WwW A VUN Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document i
10. Basic models Learning about the printer 11 Automatic Document Feeder ADF Printer control panel Standard exit bin Multipurpose feeder 550 sheet tray Tray 1 550 sheet tray Tray 2 NIOJ Bl wn e Optional output bin Selecting a location for the printer When selecting a location for the printer leave enough room to open trays covers and doors If you plan to install any options leave enough room for them also It is important to e Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard e Provide a flat sturdy and stable surface Keep the printer Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners heaters or ventilators Free from direct sunlight humidity extremes or temperature fluctuations Clean dry and free of dust e Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation Right Side 20 cm 8 in Left Side 31 cm 12 in 51 cm 20 in Rear 20 cm 8 in 1 2 3 Front 4 5 Top 31 cm 12 in Learning about the printer 12 Basic functions of the scanner The scanner provides copy fax and scan to network capability for large workgroups You can e Make quick copies or change the settings on the printer control panel to perform specific copy jobs e Send a fax using the printer control panel e Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time Scan
11. Output options If the high capacity output expander 4 bin mailbox or StapleSmart finisher is listed on the menu settings page but paper jams when it exits the printer or enters the output option then it may not be properly installed Reinstall the option For more information see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option Flash memory card Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board Hard disk with adapter Make sure the hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board Internal Solutions Port If the Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP does not operate correctly then these are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE ISP CONNECTIONS e Make sure the ISP is securely attached to the printer system board e Make sure the cable is securely connected to the correct connector CHECK THE CABLE Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY For information about installing software for network printing see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD Memory card Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board Troubleshooting 270 Solving paper feed problems Paper frequently jams These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER Use recommended paper and specialty
12. Remove the unrecognized USB hub USB USB lt x gt The printer is using a USB cable connection The USB port is the active communication link Waiting for redial The printer is waiting to redial the fax number Wait for the message to clear 30 Invalid refill change cartridge Remove the print cartridge and then install a supported one 31 Replace defective cartridge Remove the defective print cartridge and then install a new one 32 Cartridge part number unsupported by device Remove the print cartridge and then install a supported one Understanding printer messages 233 34 Short paper Try one or more of the following e Load the appropriate paper or other specialty media in the proper tray e Touch Continue to clear the message and print the job using a different paper tray e Check tray length and width guides and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray Check the Print Properties or Print dialog settings to make sure the print job is requesting the correct paper size and type Check that the paper size is correctly set For example if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed e Cancel the current print job 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing e To enable Resource Save after receiving this message make sure t
13. 1 This size appears in the Paper Size menu only when the paper source does not support size sensing or when size sensing 3This size setting formats the page for 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in unless the size is specified by the software application 4 To support duplexing the Universal width must be between 148 mm 5 8 in and 216 mm 8 5 in Universal length must be between 182 mm 7 2 in and 356 mm 14 in J Note An optional 250 sheet Universally Adjustable Tray is available for sizes smaller than A5 such as index cards Paper types and weights supported by the printer The printer engine supports 60 176 g m 16 47 Ib paper weights The duplex unit supports 63 170 g m 17 45 Ib paper weights Paper and specialty media guidelines 83 Paper type 250 or 550 sheet Optional 2000 sheet Multipurpose feeder Duplex unit trays standard or tray optional Paper e Plain Bond e Colored e Custom Letterhead e Light e Heavy Preprinted Rough Cotton Recycled Card stock Envelopes Labels t Paper e Vinyl Transparencies 1 Printing labels requires a special label fuser cleaner which prevents duplexing The label fuser cleaner is included with the special cartridge required for label applications Paper types and weights supported by the finisher Use this table to determine the possible output destinations of print jobs which use supported paper t
14. Description SMTP Timeout 5 30 Reply Address Use SSL Disabled Negotiate Required send the e mail Note 30 seconds is the factory default setting Specifies server information This is a required item Notes e The message box has a limitation of 512 characters Disabled is the factory default setting for Use SSL Specifies the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to SMTP Server Authentication No authentication required Login Plain CRAM MD5 Digest MD5 NTLM Kerberos 5 Specifies the type of user authentication required for scan to e mail privileges Note No authentication required is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 161 Menu item Description Device Initiated E mail Specifies server information None Notes Use Device SMTP Credentials e The message boxes have a limitation of 512 characters psig E mail l Ser inlated E mal e None is the factory default setting for Device Initiated E mail and None User Initiated E mail Use Device SMTP Credentials Use Session User ID and Password Use Session E mail address and Password Prompt User Device Userid Device password Kerberos 5 Realm NTLM Domain A on Network Reports menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network lt x gt gt Std Network Setup or Net lt x gt Setup gt Reports or Network Reports Desc
15. Note Off is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options Specifies the name of the fax within the printer Station Number Station ID Station Name Station Number Enable Manual Fax On Off Specifies a number associated with the fax Specifies how the fax is identified Sets the printer to fax manually only which requires a line splitter and a telephone hand set Notes e Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax number Touch 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function Memory Use All receive Mostly receive Equal Mostly sent All send Defines the allocation of non volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs Notes e All receive specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs e Mostly receive specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs Equal is the factory default setting Equal splits the memory for sending and receiving fax jobs into equal amounts e Mostly sent specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs e All send specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs Understanding printer menus Menu item Cancel Faxes Allow Don t Allow Caller ID FSK DTMF Fax number masking Off From left From right 190 Description Specifies whether the printer may cancel fax jobs Note If Cancel Faxes is not enabled it will not appear
16. The printer receives page lt n gt of the fax job where lt n gt is the number of the page received Wait for the message to clear Remove packaging material check lt x gt Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location Remove paper from lt linked bin set name gt Remove the paper from the specified bin The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then touch Continue Remove paper from all bins Remove the paper from all of the bins The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then touch Continue Remove paper from bin lt x gt Remove the paper from the specified bin The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then touch Continue Remove paper from standard output bin Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin Replace lt x gt if restarting job One or more messages which interrupted a scan job are now cleared Replace the original documents in the scanner to restart the scan job lt x gt is a page of the scan job Try one or more of the following e Touch Cancel Job if a scan job is processing when the message appears This cancels the job and clears the message Touch Scan from Automatic Document Feeder if the page jam recovery is active Scanning resumes fro
17. This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e mail Orientation This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation Binding Tells the printer whether the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side E mail Subject This option lets you enter a subject line for your e mail You can enter up to 255 characters E mailing 111 E mail File Name This option lets you customize the attachment file name E mail Message This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment Resolution Adjusts the output quality of your e mail Increasing the image resolution increases the e mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e mail file size Send As This option sets the output PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS for the scanned image PDF Creates a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com Secure PDF Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access TIFF Creates multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usuall
18. Function Returns to the home screen Scroll down Opens a drop down list Learning about the printer 17 Button Function Left scroll decrease Scrolls to another value in decreasing order E Right scroll increase Scrolls to another value in increasing order J Left arrow Scrolls left 6 Right arrow Scrolls right 4 Submit Saves a value as the new user default setting Back Navigates back to the previous screen Other touch screen buttons Button Function Down arrow Moves down to the next screen Up arrow Moves up to the next screen Unselected radio button This is an unselected radio button The radio button is gray to show it is unselected Learning about the printer Button Selected radio button 18 Function This is a selected radio button The radio button is blue to show it is selected Cancel Jobs Opens the Cancel Jobs screen The Cancel Jobs screen shows three headings Print Fax and Network The following items are available under the Print Fax and Network headings e Print job e Copy job e Fax profile e FTP E mail send Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can show only three jobs per screen Each job appears as a button which you can touch to access information about the job If more than three jobs exist in a column then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs
19. Negative Image Select this box to create a negative image scan Improving scan quality Question Tip When should use Text Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the scan and preserving images mode copied from the original document is not a concern Text mode is recommended for receipts carbon copy forms and documents that only contain text or fine line art When should use Use Text Photo mode when scanning an original document that contains a mixture of text Text Photo mode and graphics Text Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles business graphics and brochures K When should I use Photo Use Photo mode when scanning photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or mode newspaper rd Clearing jams 131 Clearing jams Jam error messages appear on the control panel display and include the area of the printer where the jam occurred When there is more than one jam the number of jammed pages is displayed Avoiding jams The following hints can help you avoid jams Paper tray recommendations Make sure the paper lies flat in the tray Do not remove trays while the printer is printing Do not load trays the multipurpose feeder or the envelope feeder while the printer is printing Load them prior to printing or wait for a prompt to load them Do not load too much paper Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum hei
20. SSS SSS SSS SSS lt SS lt lt SS _ Note If an optional printer hard disk is currently installed then the printer hard disk must first be removed To remove the hard disk a Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the system board leaving the cable attached to the printer hard disk To unplug the cable squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling the cable out Additional printer setup 28 c Remove the printer hard disk by pulling it upward to unseat the standoffs i d Remove the thumbscrews that attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket to the printer hard disk and then remove the bracket Set the printer hard disk aside Additional printer setup 29 4 Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening 5 Align the posts of the plastic tee to the holes in the system board and then press downward until the tee snaps into place Be sure each post of the tee has latched completely and that the tee is seated firmly onto the system board IM Additional printer setup 30 6 Install the ISP onto the plastic tee Angle the ISP over the plastic tee and then approach the plastic tee so that any overhanging connectors will pass through the ISP opening in the system board cage nt 8 Insert
21. Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures This setting increases the time it takes to scan but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document Printed Image Used when copying halftone photographs graphics such as documents printed on a laser printer or pages from a magazine or newspaper that are composed primarily of images Sides Duplex Use this option to select duplex settings You can print copies on one or two sides make two sided copies duplex of two sided original documents make two sided copies from one sided original documents or make one sided copies simplex from two sided original documents Copying 104 Collate This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document The factory default setting for Collate is on the output pages of your copies will be ordered 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 If you want all the copies of each page to remain together turn Collate off and your copies will be ordered 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 Options Touching the Options button opens a screen where you can change Paper Saver Advanced Imaging Custom Job Separator Sheets Margin Shift Edge Erase Header Footer Overlay Content Advanced Duplex and Save as Shortcut settings Paper Saver This option lets you print two or more sheets of an original document together on the same page Paper Saver is also called N up print
22. Text Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles business graphics and brochures Use Photo mode when the original document is composed mostly of photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or newspaper Scanning to a computer or flash drive 127 Scanning to a computer or flash drive Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or to a flash drive The computer does not have to be directly connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images You can scan the document back to the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer Scanning to a computer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Scan Profile Click Create Select your scan settings and then click Next Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file a uu A WwW N Enter a scan name The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display N Click Submit 8 Review the instructions on the S
23. The Universal Paper Size is a user defined paper size setting It is listed with the other paper size settings and includes similar options such as support for duplex printing and printing multiple pages on one sheet Menu item Description Units of Measure Identifies the units of measure Inches Notes Millimeters Inches is the US factory default setting e Millimeters is the international factory default setting Understanding printer menus 155 Menu item Description Portrait Width Sets the portrait width 3 14 inches Notes 76 360 mm e If the width exceeds the maximum the printer uses the maximum width allowed e 8 5 inches is the US factory default setting Inches can be increased in 0 01 inch increments e 216 mm is the international factory default setting Millimeters can be increased in 1 mm increments Portrait Height Sets the portrait height 3 14 inches Notes 76 360 mm e Ifthe height exceeds the maximum the printer uses the maximum height allowed 14 inches is the US factory default setting Inches can be increased in 0 01 inch increments e 356 mm is the international factory default setting Millimeters can be increased in 1 mm increments Feed Direction Specifies the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction Short Edge Notes Long Edge e Short Edge is the factory default setting Long Edge appears only if the longest edge is shorter than the maximum
24. These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE Replace the print cartridge THE CHARGE ROLLS MAY BE DEFECTIVE Replace the charge rolls 280 Troubleshooting 281 THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH Contact Customer Support Toner rubs off These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting e For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog CHECK THE PAPER TEXTURE SETTING From the printer control panel Paper menu make sure the Paper Texture setting matches the paper loaded in the tray Toner specks These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE Replace the print cartridge Troubleshooting 282 THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH Contact Customer Support Transparency print quality is poor Try one or more of the following CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES Use only transparencies recommended by the printer manufacturer CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Pa
25. c Click the IP tab d Type the printer IP address in the address field and then click Add For AppleTalk printing Notes Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10 5 a From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp Fax b Click and then navigate to AppleTalk gt select the printer gt Add Setting up serial printing Use serial printing to print when the computer is far from the printer or to print at a reduced speed Additional printer setup 52 After installing the serial or communication COM port configure the printer and the computer Make sure you have connected the serial cable to the COM port on your printer 1 Set the parameters in the printer a b c From the printer control panel navigate to the menu for the port settings Locate the menu for the serial port settings and then adjust the settings if necessary Save the modified settings and then print a menu settings page 2 Install the printer driver a mn 0 Qa O h Obtain a copy of the software installer package From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer From our Web site Go to http support lexmark com and then navigate to SUPPORT amp DOWNLOAD gt select your printer gt select your operating system Double click the software installer package Wait for the installation dialog to appear If you
26. into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF adjust the paper guides 3 Onthe home screen touch FTP 4 Touch Search Address Book 5 Type the name or part of the name you are searching for and then touch Search 6 Touch the name that you want to add to the To field 7 Touch Send It Creating shortcuts Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the control panel each time you want to send a document to an FTP server you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number There are two methods for creating shortcut numbers using a computer and using the printer touch screen Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Under Other Settings click Manage Shortcuts Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password get one from your system support person 4 Click FTP Shortcut Setup 5 Enter the appropriate information into the boxes Scanning to an FTP address 124 6 Enter a shortcut number If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 7 Click Add Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen 1 On the home screen touch FTP 2
27. limit mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas d passer cing Le num ro REN du modem est indiqu sur l tiquette produit situ e l arri re de l quipement Les compagnies de t l phone constatent que les surtensions lectriques en particulier celles dues la foudre entra nent d importants d g ts sur les terminaux priv s connect s a des sources d alimentation CA Il s agit la d un probl me majeur d chelle nationale En cons quence il vous est recommand de brancher un parasurtenseur dans la prise de courant laquelle l quipement est connect Utilisez un parasurtenseur r pondant des caract ristiques nominales satisfaisantes et certifi par le laboratoire d assureurs UL Underwriter s Laboratories un autre laboratoire agr de type NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory ou un organisme de certification agr dans votre r gion ou pays Ceci pr vient tout endommagement de l quipement caus par les orages et autres surtensions lectriques Cet quipement utilise des prises de t l phone CA11A Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom nor does it provide any so
28. small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Onthe home screen touch Fax uw O on an Faxing 116 Touch Search Address Book Using the virtual keyboard type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time Touch Search Touch the name to add it to the Fax to list Repeat steps 4 through 7 to enter additional addresses Touch Fax It Customizing fax settings Changing the fax resolution Adjusting the resolution setting changes the quality of the fax Settings range from Standard fastest speed to Ultra Fine slowest speed best quality 1 vn Oo Wu A W N Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Fax Use the keypad to enter the fax number Touch Options From the Resolution area touch the arrows to change to the resolution you want Touch Fax It Making a fax lighter or darker 1 Nn oO WW A VUN Load an or
29. they must be set manually from the Paper Size menu Warning Potential Damage Do not assign a Paper Type name that does not accurately describe the type of paper loaded in the tray The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified Paper Type Paper may not be properly processed if an inaccurate Paper Type is selected Assigning a custom paper type name Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking the tray 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears 2 From the home screen touch 3 Touch Paper Menu 4 Touch Paper Size Type 5 Touch the paper type arrows for the desired tray until the correct custom type appears 6 Touch the tray number or MP Feeder Type 7 Touch Submit Changing a Custom Type lt x gt name You can use the Embedded Web Server or MarkVision to define a name other than Custom Type lt x gt for each of the custom paper types that are loaded When a Custom Type lt x gt name is changed the menus display the new name instead of Custom Type lt x gt To change a Custom Type lt x gt name from the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Under Default Settings click Paper Menu 4 Click Custom Names 5 Type a name for the paper type in a Custom Name lt x gt b
30. 257 job prints on wrong paper 257 job takes longer than expected 257 jobs do not print 256 Large jobs do not collate 258 multiple language PDFs do not print 255 paper curl 274 paper frequently jams 270 tray linking does not work 258 unexpected page breaks occur 258 troubleshooting print quality blank pages 271 characters have jagged edges 272 clipped images 272 ghost images 273 gray background 273 poor transparency quality 282 print irregularities 275 print is too dark 278 print is too light 277 print quality test pages 271 repeating defects 276 skewed print 276 solid black streaks 277 solid color pages 279 solid white streaks 277 streaked vertical lines 280 toner fog or background shading 280 toner rubs off 281 toner specks 281 troubleshooting printer options 2000 sheet tray 268 4 bin mailbox 269 envelope feeder 268 flash memory card 269 hard disk with adapter 269 high capacity output expander 269 Internal Solutions Port 269 memory card 269 option not working 267 paper trays 267 StapleSmart finisher 269 troubleshooting scan cannot scan from a computer 263 partial document or photo scans 263 scan was not successful 262 scanner unit does not close 259 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 262 U Universal Paper Size setting 64 Universal Setup menu 154 unlinking trays 76 Unsupported disk 232 Unsupported USB device please remove 232 Unsupported USB hub please r
31. 3 Holding the card by its sides align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board 1 1 Plastic pins 2 Metal pins 4 Push the card firmly into place Notes The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board Be careful not to damage the connectors Additional printer setup 26 5 Replace the system board cover and close the system board door Installing an Internal Solutions Port The system board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP Install an ISP for additional connectivity options Note This operation requires a flathead screwdriver A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the system board 2 Unpack the ISP and plastic tee Note Avoid touching the components on the card Additional printer setup 27 3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board
32. 400 600 Darkness Lightens or darkens the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Ne Understanding printer menus Menu item Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x 6in 3x 5in Business Card Custom Scan Size lt x gt A4 AS Oficio Mexico A6 JIS BS Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Letter Legal Sides Duplex Off Long edge Short edge JPEG Quality Best for content 5 90 Use Multi Page TIFF On Off 203 Description Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Notes Best for content is the factory default setting 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened e 90 provides the best image qua
33. 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in e Copy books up to 25 3 mm 1 in thick Understanding the printer control panel 1 BB oog Bow Bow OOG e E e es i 8 7 p Description View scanning copying faxing and printing options as well as status and error messages 2 Keypad Enter numbers or symbols on the display a E ee A amp 3 Dial Pause e Press T to cause a two or three second dial pause in a fax number In the Fax To field a Dial Pause is represented by a comma ou e From the home screen press to redial a fax number e The button functions only within the Fax menu or with fax functions When outside of the Fax menu fax function or home screen pressing m causes an error beep Learning about the printer 14 Item Description 4 Back In the Copy menu press to delete the right most digit of the value in the Copy Count The default value of 1 appears if the entire number is deleted by pressing numerous times In the Fax Destination List press to delete the right most digit of a number entered manually You can also press to delete an entire shortcut entry Once an entire line is deleted another press of causes the cursor to move up one line In the E mail Destination List press to delete the character to the left of the cursor If the character is in a shortcut then the shortcut is deleted 5 Home Press to return to the home screen 6 Start e Press KD to initiat
34. A fax number is dialed but the fax line is busy Wait for the message to clear Load lt src gt with lt x gt lt src gt is a tray or feeder and lt x gt is a paper type or size Try one or more of the following e Load the specified paper in the tray e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size it prints from the default source e Cancel the current job Load manual feeder with lt x gt lt x gt is a paper type or size Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size then it prints from the default source e Cancel the current job Load staples Try one or more of the following Replace the specified staple cartridge in the finisher e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing e Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Memory full cannot print faxes There is not enough memory to print the fax job Touch Continue to clear the message without printing Held faxes will attempt to print after the printer has been restarted Network Network lt x gt
35. AA AR 288 e 2 Seer ee E EN ANEA NE ENE EET EEEE AEE AERE 1 9 M Safety information 7 Safety information Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY This product uses a laser Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure This product uses a printing process that heats the print media and the heat may cause the media to release emissions You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions Use care when you replace a lithium battery A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced Replace it only with the same or an equivalent type of lithium battery Do not recharge disassemble or incinerate a lithium battery Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions and local regulations CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION POTENTIA
36. Ambient operating temperature 15 6C 32 2C Shipping and storage temperature 40 0C 60 0C Laser notice The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825 1 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The printer contains internally a Class IIIb 3b laser that is a maximum 15 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 770 795 nanometers The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class level during normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition Notices 288 Laser advisory label A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown DANGER Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated Avoid exposure to laser beam PERIGO Radia o a laser invis vel sera liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido Evite a exposi o aos feixes de laser Opasnost Nevidljivo lasersko zra enje kada su kasete uklonjene i poni tena sigurnosna veza Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima NEBEZPE Kdy jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokov na pojistka ze za zen je vys l no neviditeln laserov z en Nevystavujte se p soben laserov ho paprsku FARE Usynlig laserstr ling
37. Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial e Asan alternative dial the telephone number manually Received fax has poor print quality These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following RE SEND THE DOCUMENT Ask the person who sent you the fax to e Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory Resend the fax There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection Increase the fax scan resolution if possible THE TONER MAY BE LOW When 88 Cartridge low appears or when you experience faded print replace the cartridge MIAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Click Fax Settings Troubleshooting 267 4 Click Analog Fax Setup 5 Inthe Max Speed box click on one of the following 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 6 Click Submit Solving option problems Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following RESET THE PRINTER Turn the printer off wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer on CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONN
38. Click Settings and then click General Settings 3 Click Timeouts 4 Inthe Power Saver box increase or decrease the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Power Saver mode 5 Click Submit Using the printer control panel Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears On the home screen touch Touch Settings Touch General Settings Touch the down arrow until Timeouts appears Touch Timeouts Nn OO Ww A U N F Touch the left or right arrow next to Power Saver Mode to decrease or increase the time the printer waits before entering Power Saver mode The settings available range from 1 240 minutes 8 Touch Submit 9 Touch l Restoring the factory default settings If you want to retain a list of the current menu settings for reference then print a menu settings page before you restore the factory default settings For more information see Printing a menu settings page on page 39 Warning Potential Damage Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default setting Exceptions include the display language custom sizes and messages and Network Port menu settings All downloads stored in RAM are deleted Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears 2 On the home screen touch 3 Touch Settings Administrative support 254 4 Touch General Settings 5 To
39. First page only All but first page Enter custom text 187 Description Specifies header footer information for the bottom right of the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting for Bottom right e All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Overlay Off Confidential Copy Draft Urgent Custom Specifies overlay text that is printed on each page of the copy job Note Off is the factory default setting Custom Overlay Allow priority copies On Off Specifies custom overlay text Allows interruption of a print job to copy a page or document Note On is the factory default setting Custom Job scanning On Off Lets you copy in a single copy job a document that contains mixed paper sizes Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Lets you save custom copy settings as shortcuts Note On is the factory default setting Background Removal 4to 4 Auto Center On Off Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy Lets you automatically center the copy on the page Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 188 Description Specifies which color to drop during copies and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes None is the factory default setting f
40. Height Width e When Auto Fit is set to On Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit Fit Height Fit Width Orientation Sets the image orientation Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Rev Portrait Rev Landscape XX S XPS menu Menu item Description Print Error Pages Prints a page containing information on errors including XML markup errors Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Understanding printer menus 222 Help menu The Help menu consists of Help pages that are stored in the printer as PDFs They contain reference information about using the printer and performing tasks You may select to print each one individually or select Print all guides to print all of them at one time English French German and Spanish translations are stored in the printer Other translations are available on the Software and Documentation CD Menu item Description Print all guides Prints all the guides Copy guide Provides information about making copies and changing settings E mail guide Provides information about sending e mails using addresses shortcut numbers or the address book and changing settings Fax guide Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers shortcut numbers or the address book and changing settings FTP guide Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an FTP address shortcut numbers or the address book and changing settin
41. Max e mail size 0 65535 KB E mail Server Setup Size Error Message Specifies the maximum e mail size in kilobytes Note E mail above the specified size is not sent Sends a message when an e mail is greater than the configured size limit E mail Server Setup Limit destinations Sends an e mail only when the address contains the domain name such as a company domain name Notes E mail can only be sent to the specified domain e The limit is one domain E mail Server Setup Web Link Setup Defines the path name Note Defines the path For example directory path Server The following characters or symbols are invalid entries fora pathname lt Login gt Password Path Base file name Web Link Format Specifies the format of the file PDF pdf Secure PDF TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps PDF Version Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned to e mail 1 2 1 6 Note 1 5 is the factory default setting Content Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to e mail Text Photo Notes Photograph Text e Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the E documents are mostly text or line art e Photograph is used when the document is a high quality photograph or inkjet print Text is used when the document is mostly text Understanding printer menus 199 Menu item Description Color Specifies whether a job prints in grayscal
42. Note 5 factory default setting Understanding printer menus 197 Menu item Description Orientation Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Landscape Original Size Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Letter Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default Legal setting Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x 6in 3x5 in Business Card Custom Scan Size lt x gt A4 A5 Oficio Mexico A6 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Letter Legal Use Multi Page TIFF Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a On multiple page scan to fax job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages Off or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes On is the factory default setting e This menu item applies to all scan functions Enable Analog Receive Enables analog fax receive On Note Off is the factory default setting Off E mail Settings menu Description E mail Server Setup Specifies e mail server information Subject Note The message box has a limitation of 512 characters Message Understanding printer menus Menu item 198 Description E mail Server Setup Send me a copy Never appears On by default Off by default Always On Sends a copy of the e mail back to the creator of the e mail E mail Server Setup
43. Note On is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item Double Ring On Off Triple Ring On Off 196 Description Answers calls with a double ring pattern Note On is the factory default setting Answers calls with a triple ring pattern Note On is the factory default setting Fax Mode Fax Server Setup menu Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission Fax Server Setup Menu item Description To Format Lets you enter the information using the virtual keyboard on the printer touch screen Reply Address Subject Message Primary SMTP Gateway Specifies SMTP server port information Note 25 is the default SMTP gateway port Secondary SMTP Gateway Specifies SMTP server port information Image Format PDF pdf XPS xps TIFF tif Note 25 is the default SMTP gateway port Specifies the image type for scan to fax Content Text Text Photo Photograph Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax Notes Text is used when the document is mostly text e Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art e Photograph is used when the document is a high quality photograph or inkjet print Fax Resolution Standard Fine Super Fine Ultra Fine Darkness 1 9 Specifies the resolution level for scan to fax Lightens or darkens the output
44. Receiving page lt n gt 230 Remove packaging material check lt x gt 230 Remove paper from lt linked bin set name gt 230 Remove paper from all bins 230 Remove paper from bin lt x gt 230 Remove paper from standard output bin 230 Replace all originals if restarting job 230 Replace wiper 231 Restore Held Jobs 231 Scan Document Too Long 231 Scanner ADF Cover Open 231 Scanner Jam Access Cover Open 231 Securely clearing disk space 231 Sending page lt n gt 231 Serial lt x gt 231 Set clock 231 SMTP server not set up Contact system administrator 231 Some held jobs were not restored 232 System busy preparing resources for job 232 System busy preparing resources for job Deleting held job s 232 Unsupported disk 232 Unsupported USB device please remove 232 Unsupported USB hub please remove 232 USB USB lt x gt 232 Waiting for redial 232 printer options troubleshooting 2000 sheet tray 268 306 4 bin mailbox 269 envelope feeder 268 flash memory card 269 hard disk with adapter 269 high capacity output expander 269 Internal Solutions Port 269 memory card 269 option not working 267 paper trays 267 StapleSmart finisher 269 printer problems solving basic 255 printer software installing Windows 40 printing canceling from the printer control panel 92 directory list 91 from a mobile device 90 from flash drive 90 from Macintosh 85 from Windows 85 menu settings p
45. Wait for the message to clear Insert staple cartridge Try one or more of the following e Insert a staple cartridge to clear the message e Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the staple feature Understanding printer messages Insert Tray lt x gt Insert the specified tray into the printer Install bin lt x gt Try one or more of the following Install the specified bin 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Install the specified bin 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Restart the printer e Cancel the current job Install envelope feeder Try one or more of the following Install the envelope feeder 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Install the envelope feeder 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Restart the printer e Cancel the current job Install Tray lt x gt Try one or more of the following e Install the specified tray 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Install the specified tray 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Restart the printer e Cancel the current job Invalid PIN Enter a valid PIN 226 Understanding printer messages 227 Job stored for delayed transmission The scanning completed for a delayed send fax job Wait for the message to clear Line busy
46. a specific tray Notes e Normal is the factory default setting e Settings appear only if card stock is supported Specifies the relative texture of the transparencies loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item Recycled Texture Smooth Normal Rough Labels Texture Smooth Normal Rough Description Specifies the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Specifies the relative texture of the labels loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Vinyl Labels Texture Smooth Normal Rough Bond Texture Smooth Normal Rough Envelope Texture Smooth Normal Rough Specifies the relative texture of the vinyl labels loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Note Rough is the factory default setting Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Rough Envelope Texture Smooth Normal Rough Letterhead Texture Smooth Normal Rough Preprinted Texture Smooth Normal Rough Specifies the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray Note Rough is the factory default setting Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tra
47. are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear then do the following In Windows 8 From the Search charm type run and then navigate to Apps list gt Run gt type D Setup exe gt OK In Windows 7 or earlier 1 Click tt or click Start and then click Run 2 Inthe Start Search or Run dialog type D setup exe 3 Press Enter or click OK Note D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive Click Install Follow the instructions on the computer screen Select Advanced and then click Continue From the Configure Printer Connection dialog select a port If the port is not in the list then click Refresh or navigate to Add port gt select a port type gt enter the necessary information gt OK Click Continue gt Finish 3 Set the COM port parameters After installing the printer driver set the serial parameters in the COM port assigned to the printer driver Note Make sure the serial parameters in the COM port match the serial parameters you set in the printer a Open Device Manager In Windows 8 From the Search charm type run and then navigate to Apps list gt Run gt type devmgmt msc gt OK Additional printer setup 53 In Windows 7 or earlier 1 Click tte or click Start and then click Run 2 Inthe Start Search or Run dialog type devmgmt msc 3 Press Enter or click OK b Double click Ports COM amp LPT to expand the list of available ports Do either of th
48. background Text Photo Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures Photograph Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures This setting increases the time it takes to scan but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document This increases the amount of information saved Color Sets the scan type and output for the FTP file Color documents can be scanned and sent to an FTP site computer e mail address or the printer Advanced Options Touching this button opens a screen where you can change Advanced Imaging Custom Job Transmission Log Scan Preview Edge Erase and Darkness settings Advanced Imaging Adjusts image output settings before you scan the document Background Removal Adjusts the white portion of the output Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the white portion Color Dropout Color dropout is used for form Optical Character Recognition OCR processing Selecting a color eliminates the color from a form enabling improved OCR capabilities Contrast Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the contrast JPEG Quality Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the image compression Mirror Image Select this box to create a mirror image scan Negative Image Select this box to create a negative image scan Shadow Detail Click the arrow buttons to increase or d
49. by the printer the host computer and the software program Clipped images These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE GUIDES Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting e For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Troubleshooting 273 Ghost images CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting e For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog Gray background CHECK THE TONER DARKNESS SETTING Select a lighter Toner Darkness setting From the printer control panel change the setting from the Quality menu e For Windows users change the setting from Print Properties For Macintosh users change the setting from the Print dialog Troubleshooting Incorrect margins These are possible solutions Try one or more of
50. click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run dialog type control printers c Press Enter or click OK 2 Depending on your device do either of the following e Press and hold the printer you want to update Right click the printer you want to update 3 From the menu that appears do either of the following e For Windows 7 or later select Printer properties e For earlier versions select Properties 4 Click the Configuration tab 5 Do either of the following e Click Update Now Ask Printer e Under Configuration Options manually add any installed hardware options 6 Click Apply Additional printer setup 42 For Macintosh users 1 From the Apple menu navigate to either of the following System Preferences gt Print amp Scan gt select your printer gt Options amp Supplies gt Driver System Preferences gt Print amp Fax gt select your printer gt Options amp Supplies gt Driver 2 Add any installed hardware options and then click OK Setting up wireless printing Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network Notes e Make sure your access point wireless router is turned on and is working properly e Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network e sSiD The SSID is also referred to as the network name e Wireless Mode or Network Mode The mode i
51. company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If you experience trouble with this equipment for repair or warranty information contact Lexmark International Inc at www lexmark com or your Lexmark representative If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved This equipment contains no user serviceable parts For repair and warranty information contact Lexmark International Inc See the previous paragraph for contact information Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment consult your telephone company or a qualified installer Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem It is
52. documents and send them to your computer an e mail address a flash drive or an FTP destination e Scan documents and send them to another printer PDF by way of FTP Understanding the ADF and scanner glass Automatic Document Feeder ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings or lightweight carbonless forms You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents Using the ADF The Automatic Document Feeder ADF can scan multiple pages including duplex pages When using the ADF e Load the document into the ADF faceup short edge first e Load up to 75 sheets of plain paper in the ADF input tray e Scan sizes from 76 2 x 139 4 mm 3 0 x 5 5 in to 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in e Scan documents with mixed page sizes letter and legal e Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g m 14 to 32 Ib Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass Learning about the printer 13 Using the scanner glass The scanner glass can be used to scan or copy single pages or book pages When using the scanner glass e Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner e Scan or copy documents up to 215 9 x 355
53. for each color threshold Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast Specifies the contrast of the output 0 5 Note Best for content is the factory default setting Best for content Mirror Image Creates a mirror image of the original document On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Negative Image Creates a negative image of the original document On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Shadow Detail Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image 0 4 Note 0 is the factory default setting Scan edge to edge Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge to edge On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Sharpness Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image 0 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Print Settings Menu item Description Copies Specifies the number of copies to print Paper Source Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print from the Tray lt x gt flash drive MP Feeder Manual Paper Manual Envelope Collate Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies Off 1 1 1 2 2 2 On 1 2 1 2 1 2 Notes e Off is the factory default setting No pages will be collated e The On setting stacks the print job sequentially Understanding printer menus Menu item Sides Duplex On Off Staple On Off Duplex Binding 209 Descript
54. hard disk is preserved Multiple pass such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without first having to wipe it Notes This menu item appears only if a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed Single pass is the default setting Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple Pass method only Scheduled Method Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system Single pass from the printer hard disk All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved Multiple pass such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without first having to wipe it Notes e This menu item appears only if a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed e Single pass is the default setting e Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple Pass method only e Scheduled wipes are initiated without displaying a user warning or confirmation message K a Security Audit Log menu Menu item Description Export Log Enables an authorized user to export the security log Notes To export the log from the printer control panel a flash drive must be attached to the printer From the Embedded Web Server the log can be downloaded to a computer U
55. in slot 236 550 sheet tray standard or optional loading 65 56 Parallel port lt x gt disabled 236 56 Serial port lt x gt disabled 236 56 Standard parallel port disabled 236 56 Standard USB port disabled 236 56 USB port lt x gt disabled 237 57 Configuration change held jobs were not restored 237 58 Too many bins attached 237 58 Too many disks installed 237 58 Too many flash options installed 237 58 Too many trays attached 238 59 Incompatible envelope feeder 238 59 Incompatible output bin lt x gt 238 59 Incompatible tray lt x gt 238 61 Remove defective disk 238 62 Disk full 238 63 Unformatted disk 239 80 Routine maintenance needed 239 840 01 Scanner Disabled 240 841 846 Scanner Service Error 240 88 Cartridge low 239 88 yy Cartridge nearly low 239 88 yy Replace cartridge 239 900 999 Service lt message gt 240 Symbols scan to computer screen options 128 129 130 A Active NIC menu 158 address book fax using 115 ADF copying using 93 ADF maintenance kit ordering 248 ADF pick assembly ordering 248 301 ADF separator roll ordering 248 administrator settings Embedded Web Server 251 Answering 223 AppleTalk menu 164 attaching cables 38 B Bin Setup menu 155 brightness adjusting 252 Busy 223 buttons home screen 14 buttons printer control panel 13 buttons touch screen 16 C cables Ethernet 38 USB 38 Call complete 223 canceling print job from computer 92 canceling a prin
56. in the list then click Modify Search 7 Follow the instructions on the computer screen For Macintosh users 1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer 2 Obtain the printer IP address either From the printer control panel From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu e By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Note You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer 3 Install the printer driver on the computer a Double click the installer package for the printer b Follow the instructions on the computer screen Additional printer setup 49 c Select a destination and then click Continue From the Easy Install screen click Install e Type the user password and then click OK All the necessary applications are installed on the computer f Click Close when the installation is complete 4 Add the printer For IP printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later a oanonnrt From the Apple menu navigate to either of the following System Preferences gt Print amp Scan System Preferences gt Print amp Fax Click If necessary click Add Printer or Scanner or Add Other Printer or Scanner Click the IP tab Type the printer IP address in the address field and then click Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier a b c d From the Finder navigate
57. jiddikjara li dan il prodott huwa konformi mal ti ijiet essenzjali u ma dispo izzjonijiet o rajn relevanti li jinsabu fid Direttiva 1999 5 KE Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International Inc dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG Notices 297 Norsk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International Inc o wiadcza e niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozosta ymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Portugu s A Lexmark International Inc declara que este este produto est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Diretiva 1999 5 CE Slovensky Lexmark International Inc t mto vyhlasuje e tento produkt sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia smernice 1999 5 ES Slovensko Lexmark International Inc izjavlja da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo ili direktive 1999 5 ES Svenska H rmed intygar Lexmark International Inc att denna produkt st r i verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EG STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS LEXMARK L
58. lexmark com recycle 2 Find the product type you want to recycle and then select your country or region from the list 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Note Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local recycling center Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept Moving the printer Before moving the printer CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage e Turn the printer off using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it e Lift the printer off of the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same time Note Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer Warning Potential Damage Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty Maintaining the printer 250 Moving the printer to another location The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions e Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint o
59. mail using a shortcut number 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Press and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad To enter additional recipients press Next address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add 4 Touch E mail It Sending an e mail using the address book 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch E mail Touch Search Address Book Enter the name or part of the name you are searching for and then touch Search a uu A VU N Touch the name that you want to add to the To box To enter additional recipients press Next address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add or search the address book 7 Touch E mail It E mailing 109 Customizing e mail settings Adding e mail subject and message information 1 Load an original d
60. network lt list of zones available on the Note The default setting is the default zone for the network If no default network gt zone exists the zone marked with an is the default setting NetWare menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network lt x gt gt Std Network Setup or Net lt x gt Setup gt NetWare Understanding printer menus Menu item Activate Yes No Description Activates NetWare support Note No is the factory default setting 165 View Login Name Lets you view the assigned NetWare login name Note This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Print Mode Network Number Lets you view the assigned NetWare print mode Note This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Lets you view the assigned NetWare network number Note This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Select SAP Frames Ethernet 802 2 Ethernet 802 3 Ethernet Type II Ethernet SNAP Packet Burst Yes No NSQ GSQ Mode Yes No Enables the Ethernet frame type setting Note On is the factory default setting for all menu items Reduces network traffic by allowing the transfer and acknowledgement of multiple data packets to and from the NetWare server Note Yes is the factory default setting Specifies the NSQ GSQ Mode setting Note Yes is the factory default setting LexLink menu This menu is available fr
61. none exists consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE e Place atest call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly e ifthe telephone line is being used by another device then wait until the other device is finished before sending a fax e f you are using the On Hook Dial feature then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone Troubleshooting 265 TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT To ensure the printer is working correctly connect it directly to the telephone line Disconnect any answering machines computers with modems or telephone line splitters CHECK FOR JAMS Clear any jams and then make sure that Ready appears TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax Call your telephone company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting Voice MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions To enable both Voice Mail and the printer to answer calls you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL 1 Dial the fax number 2 Scan the original document one page at a time Can send but not receive faxes These are possible solutions Try one or more of the followi
62. not appear then do the following In Windows 8 From the Search charm type run and then navigate to Apps list gt Run gt type D setup exe gt OK In Windows 7 or earlier a Click a or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run dialog type D setup exe c Press Enter or click OK Note D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive 4 Click Install and then follow the instructions on the computer screen 5 Select Wireless connection when asked to choose a connection type 6 From the Wireless Configuration dialog select Guided Setup Recommended Note Choose Advanced Setup only if you want to customize your installation 7 Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer Note After the printer is configured the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable so you can print wirelessly 8 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Note For more information on allowing other computers on the network to use the wireless printer see the Networking Guide Installing the printer on a wireless network Macintosh Note Make sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable when installing the printer on a wireless network Prepare to configure the printer 1 Connect the power cord to the printer then to a properly grounded electrical outlet and then turn on the printer Additional printer setup 45 2 Locate the printer
63. not the printer honors printer hardware initialization On requests from the computer Off Notes e Off is the factory default setting The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the parallel port Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the computer is turned on Parallel Mode 2 Determines whether the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge On of strobe Off Notes On is the factory default setting e This menu appears only if a standard or optional parallel port is available Mac Binary PS Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs On Notes Off Auto e Auto is the factory default setting The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol e The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs Parallel With ENA Sets the network address netmask or gateway information for an external print ENA Address server that is attached to the printer using a parallel cable ENA Netmask Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print ENA Gateway server through a parallel port ee es Serial lt x gt menu This menu appears only if an optional serial card is installed Menu item Description PCL SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Of
64. or printers attached to print servers This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network lt x gt gt Std Network Setup or Net lt x gt Setup gt TCP IP Menu item Description Activate Activates TCP IP On Note On is the factory default setting Off View Hostname Lets you view the current TCP IP hostname Note This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server IP Address Lets you view or change the current TCP IP Address Note Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP settings to Off It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that support BOOTP and RARP Netmask Lets you view or change the current TCP IP Netmask Gateway Lets you view or change the current TCP IP Gateway Enable DHCP Specifies the DHCP address and parameter assignment setting On Off Enable RARP Specifies the RARP address assignment setting On Note On is the factory default setting Off Enable BOOTP Specifies the BOOTP address assignment setting On Note On is the factory default setting Off Understanding printer menus 163 Menu item Description AutolP Specifies the Zero Configuration Networking setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Yes File Transfer Protocol No Note Yes is the factory default setting Enable HTTP Server Enables the built in web server Embedded Web Server When enabled the
65. paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems Smoothness Paper smoothness directly affects print quality If paper is too rough then toner cannot fuse to it properly If paper is too smooth then it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality Moisture content The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period Grain direction Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper Grain is either grain long running the length of the paper or grain short running the width of the paper For 60 176 g m 16 47 Ib bond paper grain long paper is recommended For paper heavier than 176 g m grain short is recommended Paper and specialty media guidelines 79 Fiber content Most high quality xerographic paper is made from 100 chemically treated pulped wood This c
66. the factory default setting Bond Loading Duplex Off Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Bond as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Letterhead Loading Duplex Off Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Letterhead as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Preprinted Loading Duplex Off Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Preprinted as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Colored Loading Duplex Off Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Colored as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Light Loading Duplex Off Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Light as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting e f Duplex is selected all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including 1 sided jobs Heavy Loading Duplex Off Rough Loading Duplex Off Notes Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Heavy as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Rough as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Duplex sets the printer default to 2 sided printing for every print job unless 1 sided printing is sele
67. the following CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Paper curl These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting e For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog THE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY e Load paper from a fresh package Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it 274 Troubleshooting 275 Print irregularities These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY e Load paper from a fresh package Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting match
68. the installation is complete 2 Add the printer a For IP printing Additional printer setup 47 In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu navigate to either of the following System Preferences gt Print amp Scan System Preferences gt Print amp Fax 2 Click 3 If necessary click Add Printer or Scanner or Add Other Printer or Scanner 4 Click the IP tab 5 Type the IP address of the printer in the address field and then click Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 1 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities 2 Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center 3 From the Printer List choose Add and then click IP Printer 4 Type the IP address of the printer in the address field and then click Add b For AppleTalk printing Notes e Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10 5 or earlier In Mac OS X version 10 5 1 From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp Fax 2 Click and then navigate to AppleTalk gt select the printer from the list gt Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 1 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center From the Printer List click Add Click Default Browser tab gt More Printers From the first pop up menu select AppleTalk From the second pop up menu select Local AppleTalk Zone Select the printer
69. the memory card 1 Access the system board 2 Unpack the memory card Note Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card 3 Open the memory card connector latches 4 Align the notches on the memory card with the ridges on the connector Additional printer setup 24 Notches 5 Push the memory card straight into the connector until it snaps into place 6 Replace the system board cover and close the system board door Installing a flash memory or firmware card Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory or firmware card Only one of each may be installed but the connectors are interchangeable A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the system board 2 Unpack the card Note Avoid touching any electrical components on the card Additional printer setup 25
70. third party standalone viewer Compression This option sets the format used to compress the scanned output file Default Content This option tells the printer the original document type Choose from Text Text Photo or Photo Content affects the quality and size of your scanned file Text Emphasizes sharp black high resolution text against a clean white background Text Photo Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures Photo Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures This setting increases the time it takes to scan but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document This increases the amount of information saved Color This option tells the printer the color of the original documents You can select Gray BW Black and White or Color Original Size This option sets the size of the documents you are going to scan When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes letter and legal size pages Orientation This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation Sides Duplex This option informs the printer if your original document is simplex printed on one side or duplex printed on both sides This lets the scanner know wha
71. to protect the wireless network 2 3 4 Enter the security information necessary for the printer to connect to the wireless network 5 Click Submit 6 Open the AirPort application on the computer In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later From the Apple menu navigate to either of the following e System Preferences gt Network gt Wi Fi System Preferences gt Network gt AirPort In Mac OS X version 10 4 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Internet Connect gt AirPort 7 From the Network pop up menu select the name of the wireless network Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly To print on a network printer each Macintosh user must install a custom printer driver file and create a print queue in the Printer Setup Utility or Print Center 1 Install a printer driver file on the computer a Obtain a copy of the software installer package e From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer From our Web site Go to http support lexmark com and then navigate to SUPPORT amp DOWNLOAD gt select your printer gt select your operating system Double click the installer package for the printer Follow the instructions on the computer screen Select a destination and then click Continue From the Easy Install screen click Install gt a 0 Qa a o Type the user password and then click OK All necessary applications are installed in the computer g Click Close when
72. width supported in the tray Bin Setup menu Description Output Bin Identifies installed output bins Standard Bin Note Standard Bin is the factory default setting Bin lt x gt Understanding printer menus Menu Item Configure Bins Mailbox Link Mail Overflow Link Optional Type Assignment Assign Type Bin Plain Paper Bin Card Stock Bin Transparency Bin Recycled Bin Labels Bin Vinyl Labels Bin Bond Bin Envelope Bin Rough Envelope Bin Letterhead Bin Preprinted Bin Colored Bin Light Bin Heavy Bin Rough Bin Custom lt x gt Bin Reports menu 156 Description Specifies configuration options for output bins Notes Selects an output bin for each supported paper type Available selections for each type are Note Standard Bin is the factory default setting Mailbox is the factory default setting The Mailbox setting treats each bin as a separate mailbox The Link setting links together all available output bins The Mail Overflow setting treats each bin as a separate mailbox until a bin becomes full and then the printer automatically diverts sheets to an overflow bin The Link Optional setting links together all available output bins except the standard bin and only appears when at least two optional bins are installed The Type Assignment setting assigns each paper type to an output bin Disabled Standard Bin Bin lt x gt Note When you select a menu item from the Report
73. 2 Configure MP 147 Copy Settings 183 Custom Bin Names 154 Custom Names 153 Custom Scan Sizes 154 Custom Types 153 Default Source 144 diagram of 143 Disk Wiping 173 Envelope Enhance 148 E mail Settings 197 Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup 188 Fax Mode Fax Server Setup 196 Finishing 212 Flash Drive 205 FTP Settings 202 Help 222 HTML 220 Image 221 IPv6 163 LexLink 165 Miscellaneous 172 NetWare 164 Network lt x gt 158 Network Card 161 Network Reports 161 Paper Loading 152 Paper Size Type 144 Paper Texture 148 Paper Weight 150 Parallel lt x gt menu 167 PCL Emul 217 PDF 216 PostScript 217 Quality 214 Reports 156 Security Audit Log 174 Serial lt x gt 169 Set Date Time 175 Settings 176 Setup 210 SMTP Setup menu 160 Standard Network 158 Standard USB 166 Substitute Size 148 TCP IP 162 Universal Setup 154 Utilities 215 Wireless 163 XPS 221 Miscellaneous menu 172 mobile device printing from 90 moving the printer 249 250 multiple pages on one sheet 99 multipurpose feeder loading 72 N NetWare menu 164 Network 227 Network lt x gt 227 Network lt x gt menu 158 Network Card menu 161 Network Reports menu 161 network settings Embedded Web Server 251 network setup page 40 Networking Guide where to find 251 304 No analog phone line connected to modem fax is disabled 228 No answer 228 No dial tone 228 noise emission levels 286 notices 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 29
74. 2000 SHEEt tray vivcccsscaseveticccascesieverdesudaseeceedasaesseesddevsennsietocdeasanastlsdeseaenancrdeddastapeeivneedzeuancbee 68 Loading the Multipurpose FECCEL cccscsscccceecessssnseecececeecessesnseseeseeeeesseseessuseesesecesessssasaeeseeeseeeeeeeesees 72 Loading the envelope feeder cc ccscs siecccussetsdeinenscccectesncusauaveduatahy E E EE EE REE i 74 Linking and UNIINKING trayss en ee e anaE Ena E a ia 75 Paper and specialty media guidelines seosssesssesessesessesecseesecsssessessesesse S Paper guideliNe Se renien esserne iga g a o e e a E E E E Eaa iiae 78 Supported paper sizes types and WEIgNCS ccccssssssssneeeceecesssessnsaeeeecescecessseusaeeeecescessesnsausseeseeaeenees 81 Contents 3 Printing a COCUIMENT ie srne ee aa coeds suneada cece Cos deaoauaecads eraa AE veevadeneceayacaease dose 85 Printing On specialty mediassa seeseenbavhaadeceobasavaeecacdandehdsaeseecnecadandscaeecdbdewdahdeigeatiecees 85 Printing confidential and other held jObS cs ccccccccceccsssssssnseceeceeecesessnsaeeceeeceesessesseeseeseeeeeeesseseeeeesees 88 Printing from a MODIle CEVICE cccscsscccecceceecessesssensueseeceeceesceseseseususaeeesesecesseseseasaueseeeceeeeseseseeeeseeeses 90 Printing TOM ca flashdrive Xt csvess cacesedntetcecd lt a a a Bee dabeeveteTi ek E aia a a e todos da a a aceon dae 90 Printing information PABECSs v 00c sd ccvcedeveostassesccossvexeaisicsaveceveubuatdcdaetedseosedsaveneessdav
75. 22 E EE N A E EN E EE tadepee hastened ceased E E E tenmiaagnleneahsunaserts 139 290 294 DADE Mr aE aea ea anaran de etal ai eea need dud AKA eea Aaaa a EAA DANE ALE TERA 141 Understanding printer MenusS sssesessssessssesecsssosessesossesesossesessesessssesssse LAS WAS EE E EEE EEE E EE E TAT NE E E E TA EE E E stuns tee 143 Paper ME earra I ANA IFEA a ae ae a A A 144 Reports meni arenar aaee a A aaa NAVATE NEET T AE A A EAE RR a 156 NGtWOrk POLES AEAN E E E EAE ERE E EE AEE T EET EEA ETE 158 Securty MEn a uke AAA E aaa Aa ENE ended EANN EEEa ETETA E an Aaaa EEAO EEE EAA KANOSEN SEENA 172 Settings TEn anor ora AET E ESES 176 Helpimenune onien a a a a a a a a A E E SATs coh tats 222 Contents 5 Understanding printer M SSAageS scsssscsssccssccssccssccssccssscessssesssssssesees 223 List Of status ANC error messages srne a an E E E NEE ETONE E EEEE akre eite 223 Maintaining the printer ssssssssssessssosscssosesossosesssosessecsssessosessessssesesses 242 Cleaning the exterior of the Printe aens rinia eeraa ise ada ae aaa A Eai iae Aada uL EE NEA a eais 242 Cleaning the scanner glasse a E a a a a a a ea aiaia 242 Adjusting Scanner registration ncnion a a e a a aaa aaa 243 siola lareo EE E T T E E N dees 244 Conserving SUPPIICS ccccesesesssceceeceecessesnsnsececescessssessseaeeeeeceeesessseuseseesesscesseeseusaeeesesseseeseeeeeeessensaneess 245 Checking the Status of suppliesi tnetis a a a a a ea a aeae
76. 245 Ordering SUppliES sr rreri sevet nau O AK ERO Aee sleacadeacosvebandadedqnaacddeesdesevyeeavadedeucededansnwdeede ce 246 Recycling Lexmark ProdUCtS irera ennai ae a a A a a e aaa E a Le a eaaa 249 MOVIN GANG pr E a a T aa aa a a aa A E A a aRar aaa ani ia 249 Administrative SUpport ssssssessssosssessssoessesssosesseossssessecssossesesssossseesssess 2D Finding advanced networking and administrator information c ccccccccccececeseeseeeesesesesesnnsaueeeaeaeess 251 Using the Embedded WebServer sicions eee inp e a E iE A i a 251 Checking the device Statusssvsceacced cassvcncecceaadstdeseteewepsa E A E a a EE wees 251 Setting p e mail Alerts ereh erare a a eaea aa e a E Ea A xed e E eA ds seduede A Ea AE eA AEAEE aa aa e ATE 251 Viewing Tepara na Sittin tins cate AEE A E EA 252 Adjusting the brightness of the display cccccccccccsssssssseceeceecesssssssnsseeseeeeeessesessseasaeeeceeesesessesnsesseenes 252 Adjusting Power Saver aasre sveni irarri iin eneore EENEN E VENERN N EE TOA EEEE Ea Er EENE EE ERE ninie e 253 Restoring the factory default SEttingS ccccssssccccccecesssssssssnsseeeceescessessusseeceeeecessesesssausaeeeseeseeeeseeess 253 THOUDIESNOOUING soi csissicassceesccassevescesavevecsvesvesassunscosivevavestasovavesiaesvseeeveeessarivol OO Solving basic printer problems cccsscccccccscesssssssseseeceeceeceecessesnsseeseeeeeeceseesesnseseeseseeseeesesuaueaesusasansaaess 255 Printer control panel dis
77. 3 security information for your network then see the documentation that came with the access point or contact your system support person To find the WPA WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network see the documentation that came with the access point see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point or consult your system support person Installing the printer on a wireless network Windows Before installing the printer on a wireless network make sure e Your wireless network is set up and is working properly The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer 1 Connect the power cord to the printer then to a properly grounded electrical outlet and then turn on the printer Note Make sure the printer and the computer are fully on and ready Warning Potential Damage Do not connect the USB cable until instructed to do so on the computer screen 2 Obtain a copy of the software installer package e From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer From our Web site Go to http support lexmark com and then navigate to SUPPORT amp DOWNLOAD gt select your printer gt select your operating system 3 Double click the software installer package Wait for the installation dialog to appear Additional printer setup 44 If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does
78. 3 creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 114 creating shortcuts using the touch screen 115 forwarding faxes 121 holding faxes 120 improving fax quality 120 making a fax lighter or darker 116 sending a fax at a scheduled time 117 sending using the computer 114 sending using the printer control panel 113 setting the date and time 63 setting the outgoing fax name and number 63 turning Daylight Saving Time on 63 using shortcuts 115 using the address book 115 viewing a fax log 117 FCC notices 289 291 294 finding more information about the printer 9 Finishing menu 212 firmware card installing 24 flash drive 90 Flash Drive menu 205 flash memory card installing 24 troubleshooting 269 Flushing buffer 225 forwarding faxes 121 FTP address book 123 FTP quality improving 126 FTP screen advanced options 125 options 124 125 FTP Settings menu 202 fuser ordering 247 G guidelines card stock 87 envelopes 86 labels 87 letterhead 85 transparencies 86 H hard disk with adapter troubleshooting 269 held jobs 88 printing from Macintosh computer 89 printing from Windows 89 Help menu 222 holding faxes 120 home screen buttons 14 HTML menu 220 Image menu 221 Insert staple cartridge 225 Insert Tray lt x gt 226 Install bin lt x gt 226 Install envelope feeder 226 Install tray lt x gt 226 installing on a wireless network using Windows 43 installing printer on wireless network 43 303 installing printer
79. 48 C F R 227 7202 1 through 227 7207 4 as applicable the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U S Government end users a only as Commercial Items and b with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein Notices 285 Trademarks Lexmark Lexmark with diamond design MarkNet and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc registered in the United States and or other countries MarkTrack PrintCryption and StapleSmart are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett Packard Company PCL is Hewlett Packard Company s designation of a set of printer commands language and functions included in its printer products This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies Albertus The Monotype Corporation plc Antique Olive Monsieur Marcel OLIVE Apple Chancery Apple Computer Inc Arial The Monotype Corporation plc CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc is a product of Agfa Corporation Chicago Apple Computer Inc Clarendon Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiarie
80. 5 296 O options fax card 20 36 firmware card 24 firmware cards 20 flash memory card 24 internal 20 Internal Solutions Port 26 memory card 23 memory cards 20 networking 20 ports 20 printer hard disk 32 updating in printer driver 41 options touch screen copy 102 103 104 e mail 110 111 fax 118 119 FTP 124 125 scan to computer 128 129 130 ordering ADF maintenance kit 248 ADF pick assembly 248 ADF separator roll 248 charge rolls 248 fuser 247 maintenance kit 247 pick rollers 248 staple cartridges 249 transfer roller 248 ordering supplies 246 output file type changing 109 P paper characteristics 78 letterhead 79 preprinted forms 79 recycled 80 selecting 79 selecting weight 150 setting size 64 Index setting type 64 storing 80 unacceptable 79 Universal Paper Size 154 Universal size setting 64 paper characteristics 78 paper feed troubleshooting message remains after jam is cleared 270 paper jams avoiding 131 Paper Loading menu 152 Paper Size Type menu 144 paper sizes supported by the printer 81 Paper Texture menu 148 paper type custom 76 paper types duplex support 82 supported by finisher 83 supported by printer 82 where to load 82 Paper Weight menu 150 paper weights supported by finisher 83 Parallel lt x gt menu 167 PCL Emul menu 217 PDF menu 216 photos copying 94 pick rollers ordering 248 port settings configuring 50 PostScript menu 217 Power Saver adjusting 253 print job canceli
81. 7 Windows 47 Ethernet port 38 exterior of the printer cleaning 242 e mail canceling 110 notice of low supply level 251 notice of paper jam 251 notice of paper needed 251 notice that different paper is needed 251 e mail function setting up 106 e mail screen advanced options 111 options 110 111 E mail Settings menu 197 e mailing adding message line 109 adding subject line 109 changing output file type 109 configuring the e mail settings 107 creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 107 creating shortcuts using the touch screen 107 setting up e mail function 106 using shortcut numbers 108 using the address book 108 using the touch screen 108 F factory defaults restoring printer control panel menus 253 fax card installing 36 Fax failed 224 Fax memory full 225 Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup menu 188 Index Fax Mode Fax Server Setup menu 196 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator 225 fax quality improving 120 fax screen advanced options 119 options 118 119 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator 225 Fax Station Name not set up 225 Fax Station Number not set up 225 fax troubleshooting blocking junk faxes 117 caller ID is not shown 263 can receive but not send faxes 266 can send but not receive faxes 265 cannot send or receive a fax 264 received fax has poor print quality 266 faxing canceling a fax job 118 changing resolution 116 choosing a fax connection 5
82. 8 custom job job build 100 document containing mixed paper sizes 96 enlarging 97 from one size to another 95 improving copy quality 105 making transparencies 94 multiple pages on one sheet 99 on both sides of the paper duplexing 97 photos 94 placing separator sheets between copies 99 quick copy 93 reducing 97 selecting a tray 96 to letterhead 95 using the ADF 93 using the scanner glass flatbed 94 Custom Bin Names menu 154 Custom Names menu 153 custom paper type assigning 76 Custom Scan Sizes menu 154 Custom Type lt x gt changing name 76 Custom Types menu 153 customer support contacting 282 D date and time setting 63 Default Source menu 144 Dialing 224 directory list printing 91 Disk corrupted 224 Disk Full Scan Job Canceled 224 Disk Wiping menu 173 display troubleshooting display is blank 255 display shows only diamonds 255 display printer control panel 13 adjusting brightness 252 documents printing from Macintosh 85 from Windows 85 duplexing 97 E Embedded Web Server 251 administrator settings 251 checking device status 251 does not open 282 networking settings 251 setting up e mail alerts 251 Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide where to find 251 emission notices 286 289 290 294 295 302 enlarging a copy 97 Envelope Enhance 148 envelopes loading 72 74 tips on using 86 Ethernet network setup using Macintosh 47 using Windows 47 Ethernet networking Macintosh 4
83. Background Removal 4 to 4 192 Description Specifies the dialing sound either as a tone or a pulse Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Auto Center On Off Lets you automatically center the fax on the page Note Off is the factory default setting Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast Best for content 0 5 Mirror Image On Off Negative Image On Off Specifies which color to drop during faxing and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Specifies the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Creates a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Creates a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item Shadow Detail 0 4 Scan edge to edge 193 Description Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a fax Not
84. Content Specifies the type of content contained in the copy job Text Photo Notes Photograph e Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the original Printed Image documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures Text e Photograph tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures This setting increases the time it takes to scan but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document This increases the amount of information saved Printed Image is used when jobs are composed primarily of images Printed Image converts the images to halftone Halftoning makes a grayscale or color image printable by transforming it to a pattern of small spots with a limited number of colors Text emphasizes sharp black high resolution text against a clean white background Sides Duplex Specifies whether an original document is duplex two sided or simplex one sided 1 sided to 1 sided and then specifies whether the copy should be duplex or simplex 1 sided to 2 sided Notes 2 sided to 1 sided Pare ay SN nans 2 sided to 2 sided 1 sided to 1 sided The original page has printing on one side The copied page will have printing on one side 1 sided to 2 sided The original page has printing on one side The copied page will have printing on both sides For example if the original is six sheets the copy is three sheets with printing
85. ECTED TO THE PRINTER 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the printer from the wall outlet 3 Check the connection between the option and the printer MIAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list If the option is not listed reinstall it MIAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED From the program you are using select the option Mac OS 9 users should make sure the printer is set up in the Chooser Paper trays These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY 1 Open the paper tray 2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds Troubleshooting 268 3 Make sure paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper 4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly RESET THE PRINTER Turn the printer off wait about 10 seconds and then turn the printer on MAKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY If the paper tray is listed on the menu settings page but paper jams when it enters or exits the tray then it may not be properly installed Reinstall the paper tray For more information see the hardware setup documentation that came with the paper tray or go to http support lexmark com to view the paper tray instruction sheet 2000 sheet tray These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE ELEVATOR TRAY IS NOT WORKING PROPERLY e Make sure the printer is properly connected to th
86. ED PRINTERS AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS Lexmark International Inc Lexington KY This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada For customers outside the U S refer to the country specific warranty information that came with your product This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use and not for resale from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer referred to in this statement as Remarketer Limited warranty Lexmark warrants that this product lIs manufactured from new parts or new and serviceable used parts which perform like new parts ls during normal use free from defects in material and workmanship If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement at Lexmark s option If this product is a feature or option this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was intended To obtain warranty service you may be required to present the feature or option with the product If you transfer this product to another user warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user Limited warranty service The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase
87. Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG E mailing 110 JPEG Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs e XPS Creates a single XML Paper Specification XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer 7 Touch E mail It Note If you selected Encrypted PDF then enter your password twice Canceling an e mail e When using the ADF touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears e When using the scanner glass touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears or while Scan the Next Page Finish the Job appears Understanding e mail options Original Size This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e mail e Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting The e mail screen appears with your new setting displayed e When Original Size is set to Mixed Letter Legal you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes e When Original Size is set to Auto Size Sense the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document Sides Duplex This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex printed on one side or duplex printed on both sides
88. Fax it Note The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time Viewing a fax log 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Click Reports 4 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log Blocking junk faxes 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Click Fax Settings 4 Click Analog Fax Setup Faxing 118 5 Click the Block No Name Fax option This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name 6 Inthe Banned Fax List field enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to block Canceling an outgoing fax Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning e When using the ADF touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears e When using the scanner glass touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears or while Scan the Next Page Finish the Job appears Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory 1 Onthe home screen touch Cancel Jobs The Cancel Jobs screen appears 2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel Only three jobs appear on the scr
89. Forwarding a fax This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number e mail address FTP site or LDSS 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Settings Click Fax Settings Click Analog Fax Setup u A WU N From the Fax Forwarding menu select one of the following Print e Print and Forward e Forward 6 From the Forward to menu select one of the following e Fax e E mail e FTP e LDSS e eSF 7 Click inside the Forward to Shortcut box and then enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded Note The shortcut number must be a valid shortcut number for the setting that was selected in the Forward to menu 8 Click Submit Scanning to an FTP address 122 Scanning to an FTP address ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol FTP server Only one FTP address may be sent to the server at a time When an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person the name of the destination becomes available as a shortcut number or it i
90. L INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage Turn the printer off using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it e Lift the printer off the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same time Note Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer s authorized replacement Use only the telecommunications RJ 11 cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Make sure that all external connections such as Ethernet and telephone system connections are properly installed in their marked plug in ports This product is designed tested and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer s components The safety
91. LEXMARK X65x Series User s Guide November 2012 www lexmark com Machine type s 7462 Model s 0A1 0A5 2A1 2A2 2A5 2A6 4A2 4A6 031 035 231 232 235 236 432 436 Contents 2 Contents Safety information sssessssosseseosseseosessssossesecsssseossssesossesecsesseessssesosssseeses Learning about the printer sessssessssssosscosesssosesseesecssssecsessssossssssesossossesese J Finding information about the Printer ccccsccsssscccccceceecescessensueseeceeceecceseesseeusaeeeeeseeesesessesneeseseseeenes 9 Printer configurations sissien a a E a E E Eaa aaaea iSS 10 Selecting a location for the printerserie a e eiea eaea aaae EE aaae 11 Basic functions of the SCANNMET cceesccceeseseeceeseseseceeseaeecceseaeeeessaacecesseuecesseeaeeceeseeecesseeaeeseseeeseeeeeeeeaes 12 Understanding the ADF and scanner glass cc sccccccccccecesssssssnsseeeceeecessesssnsseeseceseessessessssseseeeesesesuseeeeees 12 Understanding the printer control Panel cccssssccscccceccsssseseeseessnsaeeceeeceecessesessensnsaeeeeeeeeseesseseeeeeeeees 13 Understanding the homie SCreENMs soseer a e a a aa a E a 14 Using the touch screen DUttOns cccceesesssssnseeceececscesesssssausaeceseeeceseesssasaueseceeeessesesassaeeseeeeeeseeeeseeesees 16 Additional printer setup ssssesssssssesssecseosessecsssosecssossesesosecssosesseosessesesse 20 Installing internal OPtiONS ccccccccccssss
92. MAC address a From the printer control panel navigate to gt Reports gt QD gt Network Setup Page gt V or gt Reports gt Network Setup Page b Inthe Standard Network Card section look for UAA MAC Note You will need this information later Enter the printer information 1 Access the AirPort options In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later From the Apple menu navigate to either of the following e System Preferences gt Network gt Wi Fi System Preferences gt Network gt AirPort In Mac OS X version 10 4 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Internet Connect gt AirPort From the Network Name pop up menu select print server yyyyyy where the y s are the last six digits of the MAC address located on the MAC address sheet 3 Open a Web browser 4 From the Bookmarks menu select Show or Show All Bookmarks Additional printer setup 46 5 Under COLLECTIONS select Bonjour or Rendezvous and then double click the printer name Note The application referred to as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10 2 is now called Bonjour by Apple Inc 6 From the Embedded Web Server navigate to the location of the wireless settings information Configure the printer for wireless access 1 Type the network name SSID in the appropriate field Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode setting if you are using an access point wireless router Select the type of security you want to use
93. Network lt x gt software error lt x gt is the number of the network connection Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to continue printing Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer e Upgrade flash the network firmware in the printer or print server 54 Serial option lt x gt error lt x gt is the number of the serial option Try one or more of the following e Check that the serial cable is connected correctly and is the proper one for the serial port e Check that the serial interface parameters protocol baud parity and data bits are set correctly on the printer and host computer Touch Continue to continue printing Turn the printer power off and then back on to reset the printer 54 Standard network software error Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to continue printing Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer e Upgrade flash the network firmware in the printer or print server Understanding printer messages 236 55 Unsupported option in slot lt x gt lt x gt is a slot on the printer system board Try one or more of the following 1 Turn the printer power off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer power back on 56 Parallel port lt x gt disabled lt x gt is the number o
94. Off appears Touch Submit O Aon QOU A W N Touch l Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting e For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog Incorrect characters print MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS NOT IN HEX TRACE MODE If Ready Hex appears on the display then you must exit Hex Trace mode before you can print your job Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode Troubleshooting 258 Tray linking does not work These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER e Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked e Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray Use THE SAME Paper SIZE AND PAPER TYPE SETTINGS e Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray e If necessary adjust the settings from the Paper Size Type menu Note The multipurpose feeder does not automatically sense the paper size You must set the size from the Paper Size Type menu Large jobs do not collate These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following Max
95. Sheets None Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages a Places a sheet of paper between pages copies or jobs based on the value selected Note None is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 210 Menu item Description Separator Source Specifies a paper source Tray lt x gt Manual Feeder Envelope Feeder Blank Pages Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print XX J Print Settings Setup menu Description Printer Language Sets the default printer language PCL Emulation Notes PS Emulation e PCL emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print jobs PostScript emulation uses a PS interpreter for processing print jobs e PCLis the factory default printer language e Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a software program from sending print jobs that use another printer language Job Waiting Specifies that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they On require unavailable printer options or custom settings They are Off stored in a separate print queue so other jobs print normally When the missing information and or options are obtained the stored jobs print Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu appears only if a non Read Only printer hard disk is installed This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the p
96. Specifies the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server refreshes Note 120 seconds is the factory default setting Specifies a contact name for the printer Note The contact name will be stored on the Embedded Web Server Understanding printer menus Menu item Location Alarms Alarm Control Cartridge Alarm 181 Description Specifies the location of the printer Note The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server Sets an alarm to sound when the printer requires operator intervention Available selections for each alarm type are Staple Alarm Off Single Continuous Notes e Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control Single sounds three quick beeps e Off is the factory default setting for Toner Alarm and Staple Alarm Off means no alarm will sound Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds Staple Alarm is available only when the finisher is installed Timeouts Sets the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention Job Hold Timeout before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and Disabled continues to print other jobs in the print queue 5 255 Notes 30 seconds is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a printer hard disk is installed Timeouts Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before the system Standby Mode enters a lower power state Disabled Note 15 minutes is the factory default setting 2 240 Timeouts Specifi
97. Statement Universal 4x 6in 3x5 in Business Card Custom Scan Size lt x gt A4 AS Oficio Mexico A6 JIS BS Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Letter Legal Sides Duplex Off Long edge Short edge Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation 207 Understanding printer menus Menu item Photo JPEG Quality 5 90 Description Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Notes 50 is the factory default setting e 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened e 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large e This menu item applies to all scan functions JPEG Quality Best for content 5 90 Sets the quality of a JPEG text or text photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Notes Best for content is the factory default setting 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened e 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large e This menu item applies to Text Text Photo and a
98. Traditional Chinese Korean Japanese Eco Mode Minimizes the use of energy paper or specialty media Off Notes Energy Energy Paper e Off is the factory default setting Off resets the printer to its factory default settings Paper The Energy setting minimizes the power used by the printer Performance may be affected but not print quality Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media needed for a print job by duplexing each page Performance may be affected but not print quality e Energy Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and specialty media ADF Loaded Beep Specifies whether the ADF emits a beep when paper is loaded Enabled Note Disabled is the factory default setting Disabled Understanding printer menus Menu item 177 Description Quiet Mode Off On Reduces the amount of noise produced by the printer Notes e Off is the factory default setting e On configures the printer to produce as little noise as possible Run Initial setup Instructs the printer to run the setup wizard Francais Canadien Deutsch Italiano Espanol Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Suomi Portuguese Russian Polski Swiss German Swiss French Turkce Korean Custom Key lt x gt Accents Symbols Tab On Off Russian Polish Tab On Off Korean Tab On Off Yes Notes No e Yes is the factory default setting e After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the Country sel
99. Type the address of the FTP site 3 Touch Save as Shortcut 4 Enter a name for the shortcut 5 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK If the name or number is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 6 Touch Send It to start the scan or touch Q to return to the home screen Understanding FTP options Original Size This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to copy e Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting The FTP screen appears with your new setting displayed e When Original Size is set to Mixed Letter Legal you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes e When Original Size is set to Auto Size Sense the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document Sides Duplex This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex printed on one side or duplex printed on both sides This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the document Orientation This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation Binding Tells the printer whether the original document is bound
100. a default paper source for all print jobs Tray lt x gt Notes MP Feeder Envelope Feeder e Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default setting Manual Paper e Only an installed paper source will appear as a menu setting Manual Env A paper source selected by a print job will override the Default Source setting for the duration of the print job e If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type settings match then the trays are automatically linked When one tray is empty the job prints using the linked tray e From the Paper menu Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting Paper Size Type menu Description Tray lt x gt Size Specifies the paper size loaded in each tray A4 Notes A5 A6 e Adis the international factory default setting Letter is the US factory default setting JIS BS Letter e For trays with automatic size sensing only the size detected by the Seal hardware appears E riyel e Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking If the same size ioe bi and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type Oficiot settings match then the trays are automatically linked When one tray Folio is empty the job prints using the linked tray Statement e Automatic size sensing is not supported for Oficio Folio or Statement Universal paper sizes e The 2000 sheet tray supports A4 Letter and Lega
101. access jam locations To resolve any paper jam message you must clear all jammed paper from the paper path The following table lists the jams that can occur and the location of each jam 9 E g 6 7 8 5N 2 NG Jam numbers Area 200 202 Printer 230 239 Duplex unit 240 249 Paper tray 250 Multipurpose feeder 260 Envelope feeder 270 279 Optional output bin 280 282 Finisher 283 Stapler 290 294 ADF cover 200 and 201 paper jams 1 Touch Status Supplies to identify the location of the jam 2 Lower the multipurpose feeder door 1 9 E 1 hj Bi Clearing jams 133 3 Push the release latch and then open the front cover U 4 Liftand pull the print cartridge out of the printer Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the photoconductor drum on the underside of the cartridge Use the cartridge handle whenever you are holding the cartridge Clearing jams 134 10 Place the print cartridge aside Warning Potential Damage Do not leave the cartridge exposed to light for extended periods Warning Potential Damage The jammed paper may be covered with unfused toner which can stain garments and skin Remove the jammed paper CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injur
102. ach fax job Receive Error Log Print Never Print on Error Enables printing of a receive error log following a receive error Understanding printer menus Menu item Auto Print Logs On Off Log Paper Source Tray lt x gt Manual Feeder Logs Display Remote Station Name Dialed Number Enable Job Log On Off Enable Call Log On Off 195 Description Enables automatic printing of fax logs Note Logs print after every 200 jobs Selects the source of the paper used for printing logs Specifies whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name returned Enables access to the Fax Job log Enables access to the Fax Call log Log Output Bin Standard Bin Bin lt x gt XR Specifies the output bin where fax logs are printed Speaker Settings Menu item Speaker Mode Always Off On until Connected Always On Description Notes e Always Off turns the speaker off e On until Connected is the factory default setting The speaker is on and issues a noise until the fax connection is made e Always On turns the speaker on Speaker Volume High Low Controls the volume setting Note High is the factory default setting Ringer Volume On Off XR Controls the fax speaker ringer volume Note On is the factory default setting Distinctive Rings Menu item Single Ring On Off Description Answers calls with a one ring pattern
103. ach the printer to a computer but you do need to connect it to a telephone line to send and receive faxes You can connect the printer to other equipment See the following table to determine the best way to set up the printer Equipment Benefits The printer Send and receive faxes without using a computer e Atelephone cord The printer e Use the fax line as a normal telephone line e Atelephone Send and receive faxes without using a computer e Two telephone cords Additional printer setup 54 Equipment Benefits The printer Receive both incoming voice messages and faxes e Atelephone An answering machine Three telephone cords e The printer Send faxes using the computer or the printer e Atelephone e A computer modem e Three telephone cords Using an RJ11 adapter Country region e United Kingdom e Italy e Ireland e Sweden e Finland e Netherlands e Norway e France Denmark e Portugal To connect your printer to an answering machine telephone or other telecommunications equipment use the telephone line adapter included in the box with the printer in some countries or regions Note If you have DSL do not connect the printer using a splitter because the fax feature may not work correctly 1 Connect the adapter to the telephone cord that came with the printer Note The UK adapter is shown Your adapter may look different but it will fit the telephone out
104. ack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant See your setup documentation for more information The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to atelephone line Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact your local telephone company For products approved after July 23 2001 the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US AAAEQHHTXXXX The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point for example 03 is a REN of 0 3 For earlier products the REN is shown separately on the label If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required If advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC The telephone
105. acket e See pe e ee ee g V2 gt A H E A c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the system board Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded Additional printer setup 36 Installing a fax card Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the system board 2 Unpack the fax card 3 Remove the metal cover from the fax card opening Additional printer setup 4 Insert the fax card and attach the two provided screws to secure the fax card mounting bracket EEE ET 37 Additional printer setup 38 5 Insert the plug of the fax card interface cable into the receptacle of the system board 6 Replace the system boar
106. actory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item Output Lighting Standard Bin LED Normal Standby Mode Bright Dim Off Power Saver Bright Dim Off Output Option Bin LEDs Normal Standby Mode Bright Dim Off Power Saver Bright Dim Off 180 Description Sets the amount of light from the standard bin or an optional output bin Notes e In Normal Standby Mode the factory default is Bright In Power Saver Mode the factory default is Dim Show Bookmarks On Off Allow Background Removal On Off Specifies whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area Note On is the factory default setting When On is selected bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area Specifies whether image background removal is allowed during copy fax e mail FTP or scan to USB Note On is the factory default setting The background of the image will be removed Allow Custom Job Scans On Off Lets you scan multiple jobs to one file Note On is the factory default setting If On is selected the Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs Scanner Jam Recovery Job level Page level Specifies how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs in the ADF Notes e If Job level is selected the entire job must be rescanned if any pages jam e f Page level is selected rescan from the jammed page forward Web Page Refresh Rate 30 300 Contact Name
107. ad emulator version from the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Maintaining the printer 242 Maintaining the printer Periodically certain tasks are required to maintain optimum print quality Cleaning the exterior of the printer 1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding 2 Remove paper from the standard exit bin 3 Dampen a clean lint free cloth with water Warning Potential Damage Do not use household cleaners or detergents as they may damage the finish of the printer 4 Wipe only the outside of the printer making sure to include the standard exit bin Warning Potential Damage Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer 5 Make sure the paper support and standard exit bin are dry before beginning a new print job Cleaning the scanner glass Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems such as streaks on copied or scanned images 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Open the scanner cover 3 Wipe the scanner glass until it is clean and dry Maintaining the printer 243 4 5 6 7 8 9 Wipe the white underside of the scanner cover until it is clean and dry Open the bot
108. age 39 network setup page 40 print quality test pages 91 printing confidential and other held jobs from Macintosh computer 89 from Windows 89 printing from a mobile device 90 publications where to find 9 Q Quality menu 214 Queued for sending 228 R Ready 228 Reattach bin lt x gt 228 Reattach bin lt x gt lt y gt 229 Reattach envelope feeder 229 Receive complete 229 Receiving page lt n gt 230 recycled paper using 80 recycling 287 Lexmark products 249 reducing a copy 97 Remove packaging material check lt x gt 230 Index Remove paper from lt linked bin set name gt 230 Remove paper from all bins 230 Remove paper from bin lt x gt 230 Remove paper from standard output bin 230 Repeat print jobs 88 printing from Macintosh computer 89 printing from Windows 89 Replace all originals if restarting job 230 Replace wiper 231 reports viewing 252 Reports menu 156 Reserve print jobs 88 printing from Macintosh computer 89 printing from Windows 89 resolution fax changing 116 Restore Held Jobs 231 RJ11 adapter using 54 S safety information 7 8 Scan Document Too Long 231 scan quality improving 130 scan troubleshooting cannot scan from a computer 263 partial document or photo scans 263 scan was not successful 262 scanner unit does not close 259 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 262 scanner Automatic Document Feeder ADF 12 functions 12 registration 243 scanner gla
109. age correctly 2 Open the printers folder In Windows 8 From the Search charm type Run and then navigate to Apps list gt Run gt type control printers gt OK In Windows 7 or earlier a Click or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run dialog type control printers c Press Enter or click OK Additional printer setup 51 3 To select the printer that has changed do either of the following Press and hold the printer and then select Printer properties e Right click the printer and then select Printer properties Windows 7 or later or Properties earlier versions Note If there is more than one copy of the printer then update all of them with the new IP address 4 Click the Ports tab 5 Select the port from the list and then click Configure Port 6 Type the new IP address in the Printer Name or IP Address field 7 Click OK gt Close For Macintosh users 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer control panel The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Add the printer For IP printing a From the Apple menu navigate to either of the following System Preferences gt Print amp Scan System Preferences gt Print amp Fax b Click
110. aged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the system board 2 Unpack the printer hard disk Note Avoid touching the components on the card Additional printer setup 33 3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board F B Note If an optional ISP is currently installed then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP a Using a flathead screwdriver to loosen the screws remove the thumbscrews that attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket to the printer hard disk and then remove the bracket b Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk with the holes in the ISP and then press downward on the printer hard disk until the standoffs have seated into place i Additional printer setup 34 c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded To install a printer hard disk directly onto the system board a Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk with the holes in the system board and then press downward on the printer hard disk until the standoffs have seated into place Mii Additional printer setup 35 b Attach the two provided screws to secure the printer hard disk mounting br
111. alidate the held jobs Possible changes include e The printer firmware has been updated e Paper input output or duplex options needed for the print job were removed The print job was created using data from a device in the USB port and the device is no longer in the port The printer hard disk contains jobs that were stored while installed in a different printer model Touch Continue to clear the message 58 Too many bins attached 1 Turn the printer power off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the additional bins 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer power back on 58 Too many disks installed 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the extra disks 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 58 Too many flash options installed 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the excess flash memory Understanding printer messages 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 58 Too many trays attached 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the additional trays 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 59 Incompatible envelope feeder Try one or more of the following Remove the envelope feeder e Tou
112. alite BO3LeNcTBUA na3epHbix nyye Pozor Nebezpe enstvo nevidite n ho laserov ho iarenia pri odobrat ch kazet ch a odblokovanej poistke Nevystavujte sa l om PELIGRO Se producen radiaciones l ser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado Evite la exposici n al haz de l ser FARA Osynlig laserstralning n r patroner tas ur och sp rrmekanismen r upph vd Undvik exponering f r laserstr len ER YR ERER SA EETL TEASE TERBORIER F JERR IRIRE EBC TB Bd RP BBA RL EN TRE See CE EINER F SER A hY vR n Nib ZEDA LE MARV PHAR SHED COV HPO ICME SRWE DIT ETS RAV Power consumption Product power consumption The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product Note Some modes may not apply to your product Mode Description Power consumption Watts Printing The product is generating hard copy output from electronic inputs 700 W Copying The product is generating hard copy output from hard copy original 765 W documents Scanning The product is scanning hard copy documents 165 W Ready The product is waiting for a print job 95 W Power Saver The product is in energy saving mode 21W 24W 26W High Off The product is plugged into a wall outlet but the power switch is turned N A off Low Off lt 1 W Off The product is plugged into a wall outlet the power switch is turned off N A and the product is in the lowest poss
113. am 239 305 293 Replace all originals if restarting job 239 293 02 Flatbed Cover Open 240 30 Invalid refill change cartridge 232 31 Replace defective cartridge 232 32 Cartridge part number unsupported by device 232 34 Short paper 233 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 233 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 233 37 Insufficient memory to collate job 233 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 233 37 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 233 38 Memory full 234 39 Complex page some data may not have printed 234 42 xy Cartridge region mismatch 234 50 PPDS font error 234 51 Defective flash detected 234 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 235 53 Unformatted flash detected 235 54 Network lt x gt software error 235 54 Serial option lt x gt error 235 54 Standard network software error 235 55 Unsupported option in slot 236 56 Parallel port lt x gt disabled 236 56 Serial port lt x gt disabled 236 56 Standard parallel port disabled 236 56 Standard USB port disabled 236 56 USB port lt x gt disabled 237 57 Configuration change held jobs were not restored 237 58 Too many bins attached 237 58 Too many disks installed 237 58 Too many flash options installed 237 Index 58 Too many trays attached 238 59 Incompatible envelope feeder 238 59 Incompatible output bin lt x gt 238 59 Incompatible t
114. ame for any trays the trays are automatically linked The printer automatically senses the Paper Size setting according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the multipurpose feeder The printer can sense A4 A5 JIS B5 Letter Legal Executive and Universal paper sizes The multipurpose feeder and trays using other paper sizes can be linked manually using the Paper Size menu available from the Paper Size Type menu Note To link the multipurpose feeder Configure MP must be set to Cassette in the Paper menu in order for MP Feeder Size to appear as a menu item The Paper Type setting must be set for all trays from the Paper Type menu available from the Paper Size Type menu Loading paper and specialty media 76 Unlinking trays Unlinked trays have settings that are not the same as the settings of any other tray To unlink a tray change the following tray settings so that they do not match the settings of any other tray e Paper Type for example Plain Paper Letterhead Custom Type lt x gt Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics If the name that best describes your paper is used by linked trays assign a different Paper Type name to the tray such as Custom Type lt x gt or define your own custom name e Paper Size for example letter A4 statement Load a different paper size to change the Paper Size setting for a tray automatically Paper Size settings for the multipurpose feeder are not automatic
115. anual Feeder or the tray that contains the paper type you want Note If you choose Manual Feeder then you will need to also select the paper size and type 6 Touch Copy It Copying a document that contains mixed paper sizes Use the ADF to copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the Copy to and Copy from settings each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes Example 1 or scaled to fit a single paper size Example 2 Example 1 Copying to mixed paper sizes The printer has two paper trays one tray loaded with letter size paper and the other with legal size paper A document that contains letter and legal size pages needs to be copied 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Copy Touch Copy from and then touch Auto Size Sense Touch Copy to and then touch Auto Size Match a uu A VU N Touch Copy It The scanner identifies the mixed paper sizes as they scan Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document Copying 97 Example 2 Copying to a single paper size The printe
116. aper Size menu Then specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper e Units of measure millimeters or inches e Portrait Width e Portrait Height Note The smallest supported Universal size is 76 x 76 mm 3 x 3 in the largest size is 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in Specify a unit of measurement 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears 2 Onthe home screen touch 3 Touch Paper Menu 4 Touch the down arrow until Universal Setup appears and then touch Universal Setup 5 Touch the left or right arrow to select the desired unit of measure 6 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height 7 Touch the arrows to select the desired width or height Loading paper and specialty media 65 8 Touch Submit to save your selection Submitting Selection appears followed by the Paper menu 9 Touch Al to return to the home screen Loading the standard or optional 250 sheet or 550 sheet tray Although the 250 sheet tray and the 550 sheet tray are different in appearance they require the same process for loading paper Use these instructions to load paper in either tray 1 Pull the tray out Note Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display Doing so may cause a jam 2 Squeeze the width guide tab inward as shown and move the width guide to the correct position for the paper size being loaded Loading paper and specialty media 66 3 Unlock the length guide squeeze the
117. aper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Onthe home screen touch Copy 4 Touch Copy from and then identify the size of the original document 5 Touch Copy to and then touch the tray that contains transparencies or touch Manual Feeder and then place transparencies in the multipurpose feeder Copying 95 6 Touch the desired size of the transparencies and then touch Continue 7 Touch the arrows until Transparency appears 8 Touch Transparency and then touch Continue 9 Touch Copy It Copying to letterhead 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Copy Touch Copy from and then identify the size of the original document u A U N Touch Copy to and then touch Manual Feeder and place letterhead face up top edge first in the multipurpose feeder Touch the desired size of the letterhead and then touch Continue Touch the arrows until Letterhead appears Touch Letterhead and then touch Continue O O N Q Touch Copy It Customizing copy settings Copyin
118. aper loaded in a specific tray Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Recycled Weight Specifies the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Labels Weight Specifies the relative weight of the labels loaded in a specific tray Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Vinyl Labels Weight Light Normal Heavy Specifies the relative weight of the vinyl labels loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting VaI Understanding printer menus Menu item Bond Weight Light Normal Heavy Envelope Weight Light Normal Heavy Description Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Specifies the relative weight of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting 151 Rough Envelope Weight Specifies the relative weight of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Letterhead Weight Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Preprinted Weight Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy C
119. aphics parallel to the long edge of the page Specifies the number of lines that print on each page Notes e 60 is the US factory default setting 64 is the international default setting The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines per Page Paper Size and Orientation settings Select the desired Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page PCL Emulation Settings A4 Width 198 mm 203 mm Sets the printer to print on A4 size paper Notes e 198 mm is the factory default setting e The 203 mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of eighty 10 pitch characters PCL Emulation Settings Auto CR after LF On Off Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return after a line feed control command Note Off is the factory default setting PCL Emulation Settings Auto LF after CR On Off Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed after a carriage return control command Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item Tray Renumber Assign MP Feeder Off None 0 199 Assign Tray lt x gt Off None 0 199 Assign Manual Paper Off None 0 199 Assign Man Env Off None 0 199 219 Description Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use different source assignments for trays drawers and feeders Notes Off is the factory defaul
120. are programs before installing the printer software 1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer From our Web site Go to http support lexmark com and then navigate to SUPPORT amp DOWNLOAD gt select your printer gt select your operating system 2 Double click the software installer package Wait for the installation dialog to appear If you are using a Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear then do the following In Windows 8 From the Search charm type run and then navigate to Apps list gt Run gt type D setup exe gt OK Additional printer setup 41 In Windows 7 or earlier a Click ie or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run dialog type D setup exe c Press Enter or click OK In Macintosh Click the CD icon on the desktop Note D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive 3 Click Install and then follow the instructions on the computer screen Updating available options in the printer driver When any hardware options are installed you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for use For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder In Windows 8 From the Search charm type run and then navigate to Apps list gt Run gt type control printers gt OK In Windows 7 or earlier a Click t or click Start and then
121. as an option Specifies type of caller ID being used Note FSK is the factory default setting Specifies the direction from which digits are masked in an outgoing fax number Note The number of characters masked is determined by the Digits to mask setting Digits to mask 0 58 Fax Send Settings Menu item Resolution Standard Fine Super Fine Ultra Fine Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x 6in 3x 5in Business Card Custom Scan Size lt x gt A4 AS Oficio Mexico A6 JIS BS Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Letter Legal Specifies the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number Description Specifies quality in dots per inch dpi A higher resolution gives greater print quality but it increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes Note Standard is the factory default setting Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Understanding printer menus 191 Menu item Description Sides Duplex Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page Off Notes Long edge Short edge e Off is the factory default setting e Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the pa
122. asw seach ead cab A O G4 beet cued daha SAGO a Tava bate da Eeke io KEET 126 Scanning to a computer Or flash Crive csccsccsecsccssccsccsccsscsscsscescssceseo L27 SEANNING tO F COMPUTE Ki vrvec ses desevecereds eri Ate weed KE a de been dad E EI EA EENE EOR Anta de ed 127 Scanning tora Tash driverinn be acaes sas a a E e a a eee seen 128 Understanding scan profile OPtions ccccccsesesssssececeeceeceecescessesnsnsaeeeeeceeceessesesenaesueeseeeeeesessseseeeseeess 128 Improving SCAN quality seisean n aa e duaeiinndedaied Ra eei te aaa eiaa head E a eani 130 Clearing JANIS adsavessscavecscsasaceateceucessiavsnanaeccsncessomsiaaes eased een ee LOL Avoiding jaN Siteeraan MTT eee erent reer aT re enter merce terre rr ecm e reer ny ern rarer mere 131 Understanding jam numbers and locations c cccccccccccccsssseesesssnsssseeececeeseseeseseeesaueaeseeeeceeesseseseseeeness 132 20O0 and 201 paper jamss iiien a e ca dedevndudnleadeoeeedadsausvededandliah aE 132 202 iPaper TIT ET E EE ONE O tei ied 134 230 239 paper JAMS aas ae ods fe adaesavedeea de ARA AAKER N S a Gah adar iaa NESE ce ADESEA SAES OTA a 135 240 249 paper aE rE S EE ON EEEIEI 136 250 papera en e E EN T See clas N on beached T N ann hed 137 PiE EMS E1 AIM EEE A E O E E E E E E E E O TE 138 270 279 paper aMi aen eea na Reed et ea A aai date fa da eh oleate dae cde dust erehen 138 280 282 Papen JAMS ccsee esis RA AEE AET E A see tare dead nea inee 138 2B3 Staple AIMS 7
123. at can be scanned into an asset database Asset Report Network Ports menu Active NIC menu Description Active NIC Notes Auto e Auto is the factory default setting lt list of available network cards gt f ea e This menu item appears only if an optional network card is installed Standard Network or Network lt x gt menus Note Only active ports appear in this menu all inactive ports are omitted Menu item Description PCL SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires On it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes e Onis the factory default setting e When the Off setting is used the printer does not examine incoming data e When the Off setting is used the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires On it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes e Onis the factory default setting e When the Off setting is used the printer does not examine incoming data e When the Off setting is used the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off Understanding printer menus Menu item NPA Mo
124. ault setting Letter is the US factory default setting 1 Appears only if Tray Size Sensing is turned off Note Only installed trays drawers and feeders are listed in this menu Understanding printer menus Menu item Manual Paper Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Paper Custom Type lt x gt Manual Envelope Size 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope Other Envelope Manual Envelope Type Envelope Rough Envelope Custom Type lt x gt Configure MP menu Configure MP Cassette Manual First 1 Appears only if Tray Size Sensing is turned off Note Only installed trays drawers and feeders are listed in this menu 147 Description Specifies the type of paper being manually loaded Note Plain Paper is the factory default setting Specifies the size of the envelope being manually loaded Note DL Envelope is the international factory default setting 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting Specifies the type of envelope being manually loaded Note Envelope is the factory default setting Menu item Description Determines when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder Notes e Cassette is the factory default setting e The Cassette setting configures the multipurpose feeder as an automatic paper source e When Manual is se
125. can Profile screen Scanning to a computer or flash drive 128 A shortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit You can use this shortcut number when you are ready to scan your documents a Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass b If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides c Press and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad or touch Held Jobs on the home screen and then touch Profiles d After you enter the shortcut number the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program you specified If you touched Profiles on the home screen then locate your shortcut on the list 9 Return to the computer to view the file The output file is saved in the location you specified or launched in the program you specified Scanning to a flash drive 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port o
126. cations Refurbishment repair refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products supplies or parts Products supplies parts materials such as toners and inks software or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD ALL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS PRICES AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE Notices 299 Limitation of liability Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document For any claim concerning performance or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph Lexmark s liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product that caused the damages This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property for w
127. ch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the envelope feeder 59 Incompatible output bin lt x gt Try one or more of the following Remove the specified output bin Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified output bin 59 Incompatible tray lt x gt Try one or more of the following e Remove the specified tray Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified tray 61 Remove defective disk Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing e Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk 62 Disk full Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing e Delete fonts macros and other data stored on the printer hard disk Install a larger printer hard disk 238 Understanding printer messages 239 63 Unformatted disk Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Format the printer hard disk If the error message remains the hard disk may be defective and require replacing 80 Routine maintenance needed The printer needs to have routine maintenance done Order a maintenance kit which contains all the items necessary to replace the pick rollers the charge roll the transfer roller and the fuse
128. creen touch Fax 4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad To add recipients touch Next Number and then enter the recipient s telephone number or shortcut number or search the address book Note To place a dial pause within a fax number press The dial pause appears as a comma in the Fax to box Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first 5 Touch Fax It Faxing 114 Sending a fax using the computer Faxing from a computer lets you send electronic documents without leaving your desk This gives you the flexibility of faxing documents directly from software programs Note In order to perform this function from your computer you must use the PostScript printer driver for your printer 1 From your software program click File gt Print 2 From the Print window select your printer and then click Properties 3 Choose the Other Options tab and then click Fax 4 Click OK and then click OK again 5 On the Fax screen type the name and number of the fax recipient 6 Click Send Creating shortcuts Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the printer control panel each time you want to send a fax you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number A shortcut can be created to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers 1 Type the printer IP address into t
129. cted from Print Properties in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh Understanding printer menus 153 Menu item Description Custom lt x gt Loading Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Duplex Custom lt x gt as the paper type Off Notes e Off is the factory default setting e Custom lt x gt Loading is available only if the custom type is supported Notes e Duplex sets the printer default to 2 sided printing for every print job unless 1 sided printing is selected from Print Properties in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh e f Duplex is selected all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including 1 sided jobs Custom Types menu Menu item Description Custom Type lt x gt Associates a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom Paper Type lt x gt name or a user defined Custom Name created from the Embedded Card Stock Web Server or MarkVision Professional Transparency Notes Labels Vicwikabal e Paper is the factory default setting inyl Labels Envelope e The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or p multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source Recycled Specifies a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus Paper Notes Card Stock Transparency e Paper is the factory default setting Labels e The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or Vinyl Labels multipurpose feede
130. d Removal 4to 4 Auto Center On Off Enables shortcut creation for FTP addresses Note On is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Lets you automatically center the copy on the page Note Off is the factory default setting Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Specifies which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Understanding printer menus Menu item Contrast 0 5 Best for content Mirror Image On Off Negative Image On Off Shadow Detail 0 4 205 Description Specifies the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Creates a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Creates a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Scan edge to edge On Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Flash Drive menu Scan Settings
131. d cover and close the system board door Attaching cables Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or Ethernet cable Be sure to match the following e The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer e The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port Additional printer setup 39 USB port Ethernet port Verifying printer setup Once all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on verify that the printer is set up correctly by printing the following e Menu settings page Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly A list of installed options appears toward the bottom of the page If an option you installed is not listed then it is not installed correctly Remove the option and install it again e Network setup page If your printer is a network model and is attached to a network print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration Printing a menu settings page Print a menu settings page to review the current menu settings and to verify printer options are installed correctly Note If you have not made any menu item settings changes yet then the menu settings page lists all the factory default settings Once you select and save other settings from the menus they replace the facto
132. d pattern Distorted graphics or pictures e Missing characters e Faded print e Dark print Skewed lines Smudges e Streaks e Unexpected characters e White lines in print These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages THE TONER MAY BE LOW When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the print becomes faded replace the print cartridge THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY Clean the scanner glass with a clean lint free cloth dampened with water For more information see Cleaning the scanner glass on page 242 THE COPY IS TOO LIGHT OR TOO DARK Adjust the density of the copy CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner UNWANTED TONER IS IN THE BACKGROUND e Increase the background removal setting e Adjust the darkness to a lighter setting Troubleshooting PATTERNS MOIR APPEAR IN THE OUTPUT On the Copy screen select the Text Photo or Printed Image icon e Rotate the original document on the scanner glass e On the Copy screen adjust the scale setting TEXT IS LIGHT OR DISAPPEARING On the Copy screen touch the Text icon Decrease the background removal setting e Increase the contrast setting Decrease the shado
133. d to be connected to a telephone interface The terminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated and certified by UL Underwriter s Laboratories another NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory or a recognized safety certification body in the country region of use This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks Avis r serv aux utilisateurs du r seau t l phonique du Canada Ce produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industrie Canada Le num ro REN ringer equivalence number num ro d quivalence de sonnerie fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant tre connect s l interface t l phonique En bout de ligne le nombre d appareils qui peuvent tre connect s n est pas directement
134. de Off Auto 159 Description Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes Auto is the factory default setting Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Network Buffer Auto 3K to lt maximum size allowed gt Sets the size of the network input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting The value can be changed in 1 K increments e The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and USB buffers e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Job Buffering Off On Auto Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing This menu only appears if a formatted disk is installed Notes e Off is the factory default setting The On value buffers jobs on the printer hard disk This menu selection appears only when a formatted disk is installed and is not defective e The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from anot
135. de a record of print errors the print time the job size in bytes the requested paper size and type the total number of printed pages and the total number of copies requested Job Accounting is available only when a printer hard disk is installed and working properly It should not be Read Write or Write protected Job Buffer Size should not be set to 100 Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to reset The menu selection is updated Understanding printer menus Menu item Resource Save Print All Order Alphabetically Newest First Oldest First Finishing menu Sides Duplex 2 sided 1 sided Duplex Binding 212 Description Specifies how the printer handles temporary downloads such as fonts and macros stored in RAM when the printer receives a job that requires more memory than is available Notes e Off is the factory default setting Off sets the printer to retain the downloads only until memory is needed Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs e The On setting retains the downloads during language changes and printer resets If the printer runs out of memory 38 Memory Full appears and downloads are not deleted Specifies the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed when Print All is selected Notes e Alphabetically is the factory default setting e Print jobs always appear in alphabetical ord
136. default setting e Higher settings show more difference between levels of gray Utilities menu Remove Held Jobs Confidential Held Not Restored All Format Flash Yes No Menu item Description Removes confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk Notes Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer Bookmarks jobs on flash drives and other types of held jobs are not affected Selecting Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that were not restored from the disk Formats the flash memory Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory option card in the printer Warning Potential Damage Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is formatting Notes e A flash memory option card must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available The flash memory option card must not be Read Write or Write protected Selecting Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory e No cancels the format request Understanding printer menus Menu item Delete Downloads on Disk Delete Now Do Not Delete Job Acct Stat Print Clear Hex Trace Activate Coverage Estimator Off On LCD Contrast 1 10 216 Description Removes downloads from the printer hard disk including all held Jobs buffered jobs and parked jobs Job accounting information is not affected Note Delete Now is the
137. default setting Prints a list of all stored job statistics or deletes the information from the printer hard disk Notes e A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available Selecting Print prints a list of statistics e Clear deletes all job statistics stored on the printer hard disk The Clear selection will not appear if Job Accounting is set to MarkTrack using NPA Assists in isolating the source of a print job problem Notes e When Activate is selected all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation and control codes are not executed e To exit or deactivate Hex Trace turn the printer off or reset the printer Provides an estimate of the percentage coverage of black on a page The estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the contrast lighting of the display Notes 5 is the factory default setting A higher setting makes the display appear lighter A lower setting makes the display appear darker LCD Brightness 1 10 Adjusts the brightness of the backlight on the display No Notes e 5 is the factory default setting A higher setting makes the display appear lighter e A lower setting makes the display appear darker PDF menu Menu item Description Scale to Fit Scales page content to fit the selec
138. derstanding printer menus 171 Description Serial Protocol Selects the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port DIR Notes DTR DSR XON XOFF DTR is the factory default setting XON XOFF DTR DTR DSR is a hardware handshaking setting XON XOFF DTRDSR e XON XOFF is a software handshaking setting XON XOFF DTR and XON XOFF DTR DSR are combined hardware and software handshaking settings Robust XON Determines whether or not the printer communicates availability to the computer On Notes Off e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to XON XOFF Baud Specifies the rate at which data can be received through the serial port 1200 Notes 2400 4800 e 9600 is the factory default setting 9600 138200 172800 230400 and 345600 baud rates are displayed only in the 19200 Standard Serial menu These settings do not appear in the Serial Option or Serial Option 2 menus 38400 57600 115200 138200 172800 230400 345600 Data Bits Specifies the number of data bits that are sent in each transmission frame 7 Note 8 is the factory default setting 8 Parity Sets the parity for serial input and output data frames Even Note None is the factory default setting Odd None Ignore Honor DSR Determines whether the printer uses the DSR Signal DSR is a handshaking signal used On by most serial cables Off Notes e Off is the factory de
139. describing your problem A service representative will respond and provide you with information to solve your problem Troubleshooting 283 Live chat You can chat directly with a service representative They can work with you to solve your printer problem or provide assistance through Assisted Service where the service representative can remotely connect to your computer through the Internet to troubleshoot problems install updates or complete other tasks to help you successfully use your Lexmark product Telephone support is also available In the U S or Canada call 1 800 539 6275 For other countries or regions visit the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Notices 284 Notices Product information Product name Lexmark X651de X652de X654de X656de X656dte X658d X658de X658dme X658dfe X658dte X658dtme X658dtfe Machine type 7462 Model s 0A1 0A5 2A1 2A2 2A5 2A6 4A2 4A6 031 035 231 232 235 236 432 436 Edition notice November 2012 The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this sta
140. documents and you want 2 sided copies 5 Touch Copy It Reducing or enlarging copies Copies can be reduced to 25 of the original document size or enlarged to 400 of the original document size The factory default setting for Scale is Auto If you leave Scale set to Auto the content of your original document will be scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying To reduce or enlarge a copy 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy Copying 98 4 From the Scale area touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies Touching Copy to or Copy from after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto 5 Touch Copy It Adjusting copy quality 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 Touch Options 5 Touch Co
141. e 0 is the factory default setting Specifies if the original document is scanned edge to edge prior to faxing On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Sharpness Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a fax 0 5 Enable Color Fax Scans On by default Never use Always use Off by default Note 3 is the factory default setting Enables color faxing Note Off by default is the factory default setting Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono Faxes On Off Fax Receive Settings Menu item Enable Fax Receive On Off Converts all outgoing faxes to black and white Note On is the factory default setting Description Allows fax jobs to be received by the printer Note On is the factory default setting Rings to Answer 1 25 Auto Reduction On Off Paper Source Auto Tray lt x gt Multi Purpose Feeder Specifies the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job Note 1 is the factory default setting Scales an incoming fax job so it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated fax source Note On is the factory default setting Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print an incoming fax Output Bin Specifies an output bin for received faxes Standard Bin Note Bin 1 is available only when the finisher is installed Bin 1 lt x gt Sides Duplex Enables duplex printing two sided printing for incoming fax jobs On Off Fax Foot
142. e 2000 sheet tray e Make sure the printer is turned on THE PAPER FEED ROLLERS DO NOT TURN TO ADVANCE PAPER e Make sure the printer is properly connected to the 2000 sheet tray e Make sure the printer is turned on Envelope feeder Try one or more of the following RESET THE PRINTER Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn on the printer MAKE SURE THE ENVELOPES ARE LOADED CORRECTLY 1 Adjust the envelope support for the length of the envelope you are using 2 For more information see Loading the envelope feeder on page 74 CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE SETTINGS Make sure the paper type and paper size settings match the envelopes you are using 1 From the printer control panel check the settings for the envelope feeder from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct settings from the computer For Windows users specify the settings from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the settings from the Print dialog Troubleshooting 269 MAKE SURE THE ENVELOPE FEEDER IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY If the envelope feeder is listed on the menu settings page but an envelope jams when it enters or exits the feeder then it may not be properly installed Reinstall the envelope feeder For more information see the hardware setup documentation that came with the envelope feeder or visit http support lexmark com to view the envelope feeder instruction sheet
143. e Identifies a specific font and the option where it is stored lt list of available fonts gt Notes e Courier 10 is the factory default setting e The font source abbreviation is R for Resident F for Flash K for Disk and D for download Understanding printer menus Menu item Symbol Set 10U PC 8 12U PC 850 218 Description Specifies the symbol set for each font name Notes e 10U PC 8 is the US factory default setting e 12U PC 850 is the international factory default setting e A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters punctuation and special symbols Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text Only the supported symbol sets are shown PCL Emulation Settings Pitch 0 08 100 Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts Notes 10 is the factory default setting e Pitch refers to the number of fixed space characters per inch cpi Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0 01 cpi increments e For nonscalable monospaced fonts the pitch appears on the display but cannot be changed PCL Emulation Settings Orientation Portrait Landscape PCL Emulation Settings Lines per Page 1 255 Specifies the orientation of text and graphics on the page Notes e Portrait is the factory default setting Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page Landscape prints text and gr
144. e Q 2400 Image Q Pixel Boost Enhances the printed quality of small fonts and graphics Off Notes Fonts Horizontally e Off is the factory default setting Vertically Fonts applies this setting only to text Both Directions Horizontally darkens horizontal lines of text and images Vertically darkens vertical lines of text and images Both Directions darkens horizontal and vertical lines on text and images Toner Darkness Lightens or darkens the printed output 1 10 Notes 8is the factory default setting Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner Understanding printer menus Menu item Enhance Fine Lines On Off 215 Description Enables a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings maps electrical circuit diagrams and flow charts Notes e Off is the factory default setting To set Enhance Fine Lines using the Embedded Web Server type the network printer IP address in a browser window Gray Correction Adjusts the gray value of printed output Auto Note Auto is the factory default setting Off Brightness Adjusts or darkens printed output and conserves toner 6 to 6 Notes 0 is the factory default setting A negative value will darken text images and graphics A positive value will lighten them and conserve toner Contrast Adjusts the degree of difference between levels of gray in printed output 0 5 Notes Ois the factory
145. e firmware in your printer to the latest version Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and or unauthorized products supplies parts materials such as toners and inks software or interfaces to stop working Authorized use of genuine Lexmark products will not be impacted Before you present this product for warranty service remove all print cartridges programs data and removable storage media unless directed otherwise by Lexmark For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period For products no longer covered by a Lexmark warranty technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee Extent of limited warranty Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any product Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by Modification or unauthorized attachments Accidents misuse abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user s guides manuals instructions or guidance Unsuitable physical or operating environment Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifi
146. e following e Press and hold the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer example COM1 Right click the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer example COM1 d From the menu that appears select Properties On the Port Settings tab set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters set in the printer Check the serial heading of the menu settings page for the printer settings f Click OK and then close all the dialogs g Print atest page to verify printer installation Setting up the printer to fax Note Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm Choosing a fax connection You can connect the printer with equipment such as a telephone an answering machine or a computer modem Note The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the wall jack Other devices such as a telephone or answering machine can be successfully attached to pass through the printer as described in the setup steps If you want a digital connection such as ISDN DSL or ADSL a third party device such as a DSL filter is required You do not need to att
147. e loading paper know the recommended print side of the paper This information is usually indicated on the paper package Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Do not mix paper sizes types or weights in the same source mixing results in jams Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead Use grain long for 60 to 90 g m weight paper Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces Paper and specialty media guidelines 80 Use papers printed with heat resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers The ink must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230 C 446 F without melting or releasing hazardous emissions Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner Inks that are oxidation set or oil based generally meet these requirements latex inks might not When in doubt contact the paper supplier Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230 C 446 F without melting or releasing hazardous emissions Using recycled paper and other office papers As an environmentally conscious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser electrophotographic print
148. e mail to operate it must be turned on in the printer configuration and have a valid IP address or gateway address To set up the e mail function 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Settings Click E mail Settings Click Setup E mail Server nN oOo WwW A VU N Click Add Under Default Settings click E mail FTP Settings Fill in the fields with the appropriate information E mailing 107 Configuring the e mail settings 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Click E mail FTP Settings 4 Click E mail Settings 5 Fillin the fields with the appropriate information 6 Click Submit Creating an e mail shortcut Creating an e mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Settings Under Other Settings click Manage Shortcuts Click E mail Shortcut Setup u A U N Type a unique name for the recipient and then enter the e mail addre
149. e or color Gray Note Gray is the factory default setting Color Resolution Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned 75 Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting 150 200 300 400 600 Darkness Lightens or darkens the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Original Size Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Letter Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default Legal setting Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x 6in 3x5 in Business Card Custom Scan Size lt x gt A4 AS Oficio Mexico A6 JIS BS Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Letter Legal Sides Duplex Off Long edge Short edge Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation Understanding printer menus Menu item 200 Description JPEG Quality Best for content 5 90 Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Notes Best fo
150. e sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 4 Load the paper into the multipurpose feeder 5 Slide the paper guide toward the inside of the tray until it lightly rests against the edge of the paper 6 Touch Continue Clearing jams 138 260 paper jam Touch Status Supplies to identify the location of the jam The envelope feeder feeds envelopes from the bottom of the stack the bottom envelope will be the one that is jammed 1 2 3 O on an wl 10 Lift the envelope weight Remove all envelopes If the jammed envelope has entered the printer and cannot be pulled out then lift the envelope feeder up and then out of the printer and then set it aside Remove the envelope from the printer Note If you cannot remove the envelope then the print cartridge will have to be removed For more information see 200 and 201 paper jams on page 132 Reinstall the envelope feeder Make sure it snaps into place Flex and stack the envelopes Load the envelopes in the envelope feeder Adjust the paper guide Lower the envelope weight Touch Continue 270 279 paper jams To clear a jam in the high capacity output stacker or the 4 bin mailbox 1 2 a uu A W Touch Status Supplies to identify the location of the jam If the paper is exiting into a bin then pull the paper straight out and then touch Con
151. e sure COLLATE IS SET TO ON From the Finishing menu or Print Properties set Collate to On Note Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the job MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY Add printer memory or an optional hard disk Unexpected page breaks occur INCREASE THE PRINT TIMEOUT VALUE 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears On the home screen touch Touch Settings Touch General Settings Touch the down arrow until Timeouts appears Touch Timeouts vn oO WwW BB VUN Touch the left or right arrow next to Print Timeout until the desired value appears Troubleshooting 8 Touch Submit 9 Touch l Solving copy problems Copier does not respond These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears Scanner unit does not close Make sure there are no obstructions 1 Lift the scanner unit 2 Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open 3 Lower the scanner unit 259 Troubleshooting 260 Poor copy quality These are some examples of poor copy quality e Blank pages e Checkerboar
152. e the current job indicated on the display e From the home screen press K to start a copy job with the default settings e If pressed while a job is scanning the button has no effect 7 Indicator light Indicates the printer status e Off The power is off Blinking green The printer is warming up processing data or printing Solid green The printer is on but idle Blinking red Operator intervention is needed 8 Stop Stops all printer activity Ea A list of options is offered once Stopped appears on the display Understanding the home screen After the printer is turned on and a short warm up period occurs the display shows the following basic screen which is referred to as the home screen Use the home screen buttons to initiate an action such as copying faxing or scanning to open the menu screen or to respond to messages 2 Hila ro FIP Ready Menus y Bernd Touch any button to begin 3 7 6 5 4 Learning about the printer 15 Display item Description 1 Opens the Copy menus Note From the home screen you can also access the Copy menus by pressing a number on the keypad 2 Opens the E mail menus 3 Opens the menus These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state 4 Opens the File Transfer Protocol FTP menus 5 Status message bar 6 Status Supplies Note This function must be set up by
153. ear the message and print without using the specified bin Understanding printer messages Reattach bin lt x gt lt y gt Try one or more of the following Turn the printer off and then back on If the error occurs a second time 1 Turn the printer off Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Remove the specified bins Reattach the bins uu A W N Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 6 Restart the printer If the error occurs again 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the specified bins 4 Contact Customer Support e Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the specified bins Reattach envelope feeder Try one or more of the following e Turn the printer off and then back on If the error occurs a second time 1 Turn the printer off Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Remove the envelope feeder Reattach the envelope feeder uu A WN Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 6 Restart the printer If the error occurs again 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the envelope feeder 4 Contact Customer Support Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the envelope feeder Receive complete The printer has received an entire fax job Wait for the message to clear 229 Understanding printer messages 230 Receiving page lt n gt
154. ecify the type from the Print dialog THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE Replace the print cartridge Solid color pages These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS PROPERLY INSTALLED Remove the print cartridge and shake it from side to side to redistribute the toner and then reinstall it THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE OR LOW ON TONER Replace the used print cartridge with a new one If the problem continues the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact Customer Support Troubleshooting Streaked vertical lines IS B DE These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE TONER IS SMEARED Select another tray or feeder to feed paper for the job From the printer control panel select the Default Source from the Paper Menu e For Windows users select the paper source from Print Properties e For Macintosh users select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop up menus THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS DEFECTIVE Replace the print cartridge THE PAPER PATH MAY NOT BE CLEAR Check the paper path around the print cartridge CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching Clear any paper you see THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH Contact Customer Support Toner fog or background shading appears on the page
155. ecrease the visible detail in the shadows Scanning to an FTP address 126 Scan edge to edge Select this box to scan edge to edge Sharpness Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the sharpness e Custom Job Job Build Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job Transmission Log Prints the transmission log or transmission error log Scan Preview Displays the first page of an image before it is included in the FTP file When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Edge Erase Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Darkness Adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out Improving FTP quality When should I use Text mode When should I use Text Photo mode When should I use Photo mode Question Tip e Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of sending a document to an FTP site and preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern Text mode is recommended for receipts carbon copy forms and documents that only contain text or fine line art e Use Text Photo mode when sending a document to an FTP site that contains a mixture of text and graphics
156. ect screen the default becomes No Keyboard Specifies a language and custom key information for the printer Keyboard Type control panel keyboard The additional tabs enable access to accent English marks and symbols from the printer control panel keyboard Francais Paper Sizes U S Metric Specifies the printer factory default measurements The default is determined by the country region selection in the initial setup wizard Understanding printer menus Menu item Scan to PC Port Range lt port range gt 178 Description Specifies a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking firewall The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers separated by a semicolon Note 9751 12000 is the factory default setting Displayed Information Left side Right side Custom Text lt x gt lt text entry gt Black Toner Display When Supply Registers Off Early Warning Low Near End of Life End of Life Type of Message to Display Default Alternate Default Message lt text entry gt Alternate Message lt text entry gt Displayed Information continued Paper Jam Load Paper Service Errors Specifies what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the home screen For the Left side and Right side options choose from the following options None IP Address Hostname Contact Name Location Date Time mDNS DDNS Service Name Zero Configuration Name Cartridge Level Custom Text lt x gt No
157. ed which are called parked jobs Printing 89 Printing confidential and other held jobs from Windows Note Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after they print Repeat and Reserve jobs continue to be held in the printer until you choose to delete them 1 2 3 4 uw With a document open click File gt Print Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup Click Other Options and then click Print and Hold Select your job type Confidential Reserve Repeat or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential job also enter a four digit PIN Click OK or Print and then go to the printer to release the job 6 Onthe home screen touch Held jobs Touch your user name Note A maximum of 500 results can be displayed for held jobs If your name does not appear touch the down arrow until your name appears or touch Search Held Jobs if there are a large number of held jobs in the printer Touch Confidential Jobs 9 Enter your PIN 10 11 Touch the job you want to print Touch Print or touch the arrows to increase or decrease the number of copies and then touch Print Printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer Note Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after they print Repeat and Reserve jobs continue to be held in the printer until you choose to delete them 1 With a document open choose File gt Pr
158. een touch the down arrow until the job you want appears and then touch the job you want to cancel 3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears the selected jobs are deleted and then the home screen appears Understanding fax options Original Size This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to fax Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting The fax screen appears with your new setting displayed e When Original Size is set to Mixed Letter Legal you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes e When Original Size is set to Auto Size Sense the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document Content This option tells the printer the original document type Choose from Text Text Photo or Photograph Color can be turned on or off with any of the Content choices Content affects the quality and size of your scan Text Emphasizes sharp black high resolution text against a clean white background e Text Photo Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures Faxing 119 e Photograph Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures This setting increases the time it takes to scan but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document This increases the amount of information saved e Color S
159. emove 232 updating options in printer driver 41 USB port 38 USB USB lt x gt 232 using RJ11 adapter 54 Utilities menu 215 V Verify print jobs 88 printing from Macintosh computer 89 308 printing from Windows 89 viewing reports 252 W Waiting for redial 232 Wireless menu 163 wireless network configuration information 42 installation using Macintosh 44 installation using Windows 43 wireless network setup in Windows 43 wireless printer setup in Macintosh 44 X XPS menu 221
160. entative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 Radio interference notice Warning This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements of EN55024 This product is not intended to be used in residential domestic environments This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal equipment such as facsimile Notices 291 Notice to users of the US telephone network FCC requirements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments ACTA On the back of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQHHTXXXX If requested this number must be provided to your telephone company This equipment uses the RJ 11C Universal Service Order Code USOC jack A plug and j
161. er Prints the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax On Off Note On is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item Max Speed 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 194 Description Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received Fax Forwarding Forward Print Print and Forward Forward to Fax E mail FTP LDSS eSF Forward to Shortcut Block No Name Fax On Off Banned Fax List Enables forwarding of received faxes to another recipient Specifies the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded Note This item is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server Lets you enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type Fax E mail FPT LDSS or eSF Enables blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID specified Enables the list of banned fax numbers stored in the printer Holding Faxes Held Fax Mode Off Always On Manual Scheduled Fax Holding Schedule Staple On Off Fax Log Settings Enables fax holding all of the time or according to a set schedule Note Off is the factory default setting Specifies the default staple setting for the attached finisher Note Only the settings associated with the installed finisher appear Menu item Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Description Enables printing of a transmission log after e
162. er on the printer control panel Menu item Description Specifies whether duplex 2 sided printing is set as the default for all print jobs Notes 1 sided is the factory default setting To set 2 sided printing from the software program for Windows users click File gt Print and then click Properties Preferences Options or Setup for Macintosh users choose File gt Print and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and pop up menus Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the Long Edge page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page Short Edge Notes Long Edge is the factory default setting Long Edge specifies that binding be placed on the left edge of portrait pages and the top edge of landscape pages Short Edge specifies that binding be placed on the top edge of portrait pages and the left edge of landscape pages Copies Specifies a default number of copies for each print job 1 999 Note 1 is the factory default setting Blank Pages Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print ee A Understanding printer menus 213 Description Collate Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies Off 1 1 1 2 2 2 Notes On 1 2 1 2 1 2 e Off is the factory default setting No pages will be collated e The On setting s
163. ers In 1998 Lexmark presented to the US government a study demonstrating that recycled paper produced by major mills in the US fed as well as non recycled paper However no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well Lexmark consistently tests its printers with recycled paper 20 100 post consumer waste and a variety of test paper from around the world using chamber tests for different temperature and humidity conditions Lexmark has found no reason to discourage the use of today s recycled office papers but generally the following property guidelines apply to recycled paper e Low moisture content 4 5 e Suitable smoothness 100 200 Sheffield units or 140 350 Bendtsen units European Note Some much smoother papers such as premium 24 Ib laser papers 50 90 Sheffield units and much rougher papers such as premium cotton papers 200 300 Sheffield units have been engineered to work very well in laser printers despite surface texture Before using these types of paper consult your paper supplier e Suitable sheet to sheet coefficient of friction 0 4 0 6 e Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed Recycled paper paper of lower weight lt 60 g m 16 Ib bond and or lower caliper lt 3 8 mils 0 1 mm and paper that is cut grain short for portrait or short edge fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for reliable paper feeding Before using these types of paper f
164. es helpful to calculate the total product energy usage Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy usage The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode s energy usage Regulatory notices for electromagnetic compatibility This section contains regulatory information pertaining to electromagnetic compatibility Federal Communications Commission FCC compliance information statement This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Notices 290 The manufacturer is not respo
165. es the number of minutes of inactivity before some systems Power Saver Mode begin entering a minimum power state Disabled Notes 2 240 60 minutes is the factory default setting Power Saver does not interact with Standby Mode Timeouts Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before Screen Timeout 15 300 returning the printer display to a Ready state Note 30 seconds is the factory default setting 182 Understanding printer menus Menu item Timeouts Print Timeout Disabled Description Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an end of job message before canceling the remainder of the print job Notes 1 255 e 90 seconds is the factory default setting e When the timer expires any partially printed page still in the printer is printed and then the printer checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting Print Timeout is available only when using PCL or PPDS emulation This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs Timeouts Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional Wait Timeout data before canceling a print job Disabled Notes 15 65535 Print Recovery Auto Continue Disabled 5 255 Print Recovery Jam Recovery On Off Auto Print Recovery Page Protect On Off 40 seconds is the factory default setting e Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using PostScript emulation This settin
166. es the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting e For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog CHECK THE PAPER Avoid textured paper with rough finishes THE TONER MAY BE LOW When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the print becomes faded replace the print cartridge THE FUSER MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the fuser Troubleshooting 276 Repeating defects N REPEATING MARKS OCCUR EVENLY DOWN THE PAGE Replace the charge rolls if the defects occur every 28 3 mm 1 11 in Replace the transfer roller if the defects occur every 51 7 mm 2 04 in Replace the print cartridge if the defects occur every e 47 8 mm 1 88 in e 96 8 mm 3 81 in Replace the fuser if the defects occur every e 88 0 mm 3 46 in e 95 2 mm 3 75 in Skewed print These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded CHECK THE PAPER Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications Troubleshooting Solid black or white streaks N N A BC D CEF These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE THE FILL PATTERN IS CORRECT If the fill pattern is incorrec
167. es without using a computer Note Setup steps may vary depending on your country or region 1 Make sure you have the following e Atelephone e Two telephone cords Atelephone wall jack 2 Connect one telephone cord to the LINE port of the printer and then plug it into an active telephone wall jack ea faj Additional printer setup 60 Connecting to an answering machine Connect an answering machine to the printer to receive both incoming voice messages and faxes Note Setup steps may vary depending on your country or region 1 Make sure you have the following e Atelephone e An answering machine e Three telephone cords e A telephone wall jack 2 Connect one telephone cord into the LINE port of the printer and then plug it into an active telephone wall jack Additional printer setup 61 5 Connect a third telephone cord from the answering machine to the EXT port of the printer Connecting to a computer with a modem Connect the printer to a computer with a modem to send faxes from the software program Note Setup steps may vary depending on your country or region 1 Make sure you have the following e Atelephone Acomputer with a modem e Three telephone cords e Atelephone wall jack 2 Connect a telephone cord into the LINE port of the printer and then plug it into an active telephone wall jack Additional printer setup 3 Remove the protective plug from the EXT port f of the printer
168. essage to clear Understanding printer messages 225 Fax memory full There is not enough memory to send the fax job Touch Continue to clear the message Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator The fax partition appears to be corrupted Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer If the message appears again then contact your system support person Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator The printer is in Fax Server mode but the Fax Server setup has not been completed Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message e Complete the Fax Server setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Fax Station Name not set up The Fax Station Name has not been entered Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message Complete the Analog Fax Setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Fax Station Number not set up The Fax Station Number has not been entered Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message e Complete the Analog Fax Setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Flushing buffer
169. est HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below AT EE EL IT LI PT RO SE SI SK TR UK esky Spole nost Lexmark International Inc t mto prohla uje e v robek tento v robek je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 ES Dansk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produkt overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Deutsch Hiermit erkl rt Lexmark International Inc dass sich das Ger t dieses Ger t in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet EMnvik ME THN MAPOYZA H LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC AHAQNEI OTI AYTO TO MPO ON ZYMMOPO ONETAI MNPOZ TI OYZIOAEIZ AMAITH EI KAI TI2 AOINE2 ZXETIKE2 AIATAZEI TH OAHMIAZ 1999 5 EK English Hereby Lexmark International Inc declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Espa ol Por medio de la presente Lexmark International Inc declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE Eest
170. ets the scan type and output for the fax Color documents can be scanned and sent to a fax destination Sides Duplex This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex printed on one side or duplex printed on both sides This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax Resolution This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax If you are faxing a photo a drawing with fine lines or a document with very small text increase the Resolution setting This will increase the amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output e Standard Suitable for most documents Fine Recommended for documents with small print Super fine Recommended for original documents with fine detail e Ultra fine Recommended for documents with pictures or photos Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document Advanced Options Touching this button opens a screen where you can change Delayed Send Advanced Imaging Custom Job Transmission Log Scan Preview Edge Erase and Advanced Duplex settings Delayed Send Lets you send a fax at a later time or date After setting up your fax touch Delayed Send enter the time and date you would like to send your fax and then touch Done This setting can be especially useful in sending information to fax lines that are not readil
171. f Notes Onis the factory default setting e When the Off setting is used the printer does not examine incoming data e When the Off setting is used the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off Understanding printer menus 170 Menu item Description PS SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onis the factory default setting e When the Off setting is used the printer does not examine incoming data e When the Off setting is used the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional On communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Off Notes Auto Auto is the factory default setting e When the On setting is used the printer performs NPA processing If the data is not in NPA format it is rejected as bad data e When the Off setting is used the printer does not perform NPA processing e When the Auto setting is used the printer examines data determines the format and then processes it appropriately e Changing this set
172. f the following CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting e For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Cannot scan from a computer These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer Solving fax problems Caller ID is not shown Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns you may have to change the default setting There are two settings available FSK pattern 1 and DTMF pattern 2 The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns Contact your telecommunications company to determine which pattern or switch setting to u
173. f the parallel port Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the parallel port e Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 56 Serial port lt x gt disabled lt x gt is the number of the serial port Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the serial port e Make sure the Serial Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 56 Standard parallel port disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the parallel port e Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 56 Standard USB port disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the USB port e Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled Understanding printer messages 237 56 USB port lt x gt disabled lt x gt is the number of the USB port Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the USB port e Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 57 Configuration change held jobs were not restored Since the time the jobs were stored on the printer hard disk something has changed in the printer to inv
174. f the printer Any cart used to move the options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the options Keep the printer in an upright position e Avoid severe jarring movements Setting the printer up in a new location Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer Left Side 31cm 12 in Front 51 cm 20 in 20 cm 8 in 31 cm 12 in Shipping the printer When shipping the printer use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit Administrative support 251 Administrative support Finding advanced networking and administrator information This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server For more advanced system support tasks see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Using the Embedded Web Server If the printer is installed on a network the Embedded Web Server is available for a range of functions including e Viewing a virtual display of the printer control panel e Checking the status of the printer supplies e Configuring printer settings e Configuring network settings e Viewing reports To access the Embedded Web Server type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Notes f you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a ne
175. fault setting The serial port uses DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical noise in the serial cable The electrical noise can cause stray characters to print Select On to prevent stray characters from printing e This menu item appears only if Serial RS 232 RS 422 is set to RS 232 Understanding printer menus 172 Security menu Miscellaneous menu Menu item Description Panel Logins Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control Login failures panel before all users are locked out Failure time frame Notes Lockout time ue e Login failures specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are Login timeout locked out Settings range from 1 50 3 attempts is the factory default setting e Failure time frame specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out Settings range from 1 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting e Lockout time specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the login failures limit Settings range from 0 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting O indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time e Login timeout specifies how long the printer remains idle on the Home screen before automatically logging the user off Settings range from 1 900 seconds 300 seconds is the factory default setting Re
176. features of some parts may not always be obvious The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not twist bind crush or place heavy objects on the power cord Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls If the power cord is misused a risk of fire or electrical shock results Inspect the power cord regularly for signs of misuse Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it Safety information 8 Refer service or repairs other than those described in the user documentation to a professional service person A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes then you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark c
177. fied in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch setting is Off NPA Mode Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional On communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Off Notes Auto e Auto is the factory default setting e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated USB Buffer Sets the size of the USB input buffer Disabled Notes Auto 3K to lt maximum size allowed gt Auto is the factory default setting e The Disabled setting turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed e The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1 K increments e The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether the Resource Save setting is On or Off e To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Understanding printer menus Menu item Job Buffering Off On Auto Mac Binary PS On Off Auto USB With ENA ENA Address ENA Netmask ENA Gateway 167 Description Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing N
178. fies the paper source for copy jobs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Transparency Separators On Off Places a sheet of paper between transparencies Note On is the factory default setting n Understanding printer menus Menu item Separator Sheets None Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages 185 Description Places a sheet of paper between pages copies or jobs based on the value selected Note None is the factory default setting Separator Source Tray lt x gt Manual Feeder Envelope Feeder Specifies a paper source Darkness Specifies the level of darkness for the copy job 1 9 Output Bin Specifies which output bin receives the copy after it is printed Standard Bin Bin lt x gt Number of Copies Header Footer Top left Top left Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Enter custom text Header Footer Top middle Top middle Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Enter custom text Specifies the number of copies for the copy job Specifies header footer information for the top left of the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting for Top left e All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Specifies header footer information for the middle of the page Notes e Off is the factor
179. flat and is not bent or wrinkled 7 From the printer control panel set the Paper Size and Paper Type Loading the envelope feeder 1 Adjust the envelope support for the length of envelope you are loading Short envelopes Fully close the envelope support e Medium length envelopes Extend the envelope support to the middle position e Long envelopes Fully open the envelope support 2 Lift the envelope weight back toward the printer 3 Slide the width guide to the right Loading paper and specialty media 75 4 Prepare the envelopes for loading Flex the envelopes back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 5 Load the stack of envelopes flap side down Warning Potential Damage Never use envelopes with stamps clasps snaps windows coated linings or self stick adhesives These envelopes may severely damage the printer Note Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper under the stack height limiter 6 Adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the paper stack 7 Lower the envelope weight to touch the paper stack 8 From the printer control panel set the Paper Size and Paper Type Linking and unlinking trays Linking trays Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or multiple copies When one linked tray is empty paper feeds from the next linked tray When the Paper Size and Paper Type settings are the s
180. following For Windows users a With a document open click File gt Print b Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup and then adjust the settings as needed Note To print on a specific size or type of paper adjust the paper size or type settings to match the loaded paper or select the appropriate tray or feeder c Click OK and then click Print For Macintosh users a Customize the settings as needed in the Page Setup dialog 1 With a document open choose File gt Page Setup 2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the loaded paper 3 Click OK b Customize the settings as needed in the Print dialog 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the Print dialog and pop up menus adjust the settings as needed Note To print on a specific paper type adjust the paper type setting to match the loaded paper or select the appropriate tray or feeder 3 Click Print Printing on specialty media Tips on using letterhead e Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities Before loading letterhead fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together Printing 86 Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead For information on how to load letterhead see Loading the standard or optional 250 sheet or 550 sheet t
181. from the list and then click Add NO UW BR WN Installing the printer on an Ethernet network Note Make sure you have completed the initial setup of the printer Additional printer setup 48 For Windows users 1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer From our Web site Go to http support lexmark com and then navigate to SUPPORT amp DOWNLOAD gt select your printer gt select your operating system 2 Double click the software installer package Wait for the installation dialog to appear If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear then do the following In Windows 8 From the Search charm type run and then navigate to Apps list gt Run gt type D setup exe gt OK In Windows 7 or earlier a click or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run dialog type D setup exe c Press Enter or click OK Note D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive 3 Click Install and then follow the instructions on the computer screen Note To configure the printer using a static IP address IPv6 or scripts select Advanced Options gt Administrator Tools 4 Select Ethernet connection and then click Continue 5 Attach the Ethernet cable when instructed to do so 6 Select the printer from the list and then click Continue Note If the configured printer does not appear
182. g a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen A Canceling scan job screen appears Once the job is canceled the copy screen appears Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed 1 From the printer control panel touch Cancel Job or press E on the keypad 2 Touch the job you want to cancel and then touch Delete Selected Jobs Note If you press on the keypad then touch Resume to return to the home screen Understanding the copy screens and options Copy from This option opens a screen where you can enter the size of the documents you are going to copy e Touch a paper size button to select it as the Copy from setting The copy screen appears with your new setting displayed e When Copy from is set to Mixed Letter Legal you can copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes e When Copy from is set to Auto Size Sense the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document Copying 103 Copy to This option opens a screen where you can enter the size and type of paper on which your copies will be printed e Touch a paper size button to select it as the Copy to setting The copy screen appears with your new setting displayed ifthe size settings for Copy from and Copy to are different the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting to accommodate the difference e Ifthe type or size of paper tha
183. g from one size to another 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 Touch Copy from and then identify the size of the original document 5 Touch Copy to and then select the size you want the copy to be Note If you select a paper size that is different from the Copy from size then the printer will scale the size automatically 6 Touch Copy It Copying 96 Making copies using paper from a selected tray During the copy process you can select the tray that contains the paper type of choice For example if specialty media is located in the multipurpose feeder and you want to make copies on that media 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 Touch Copy from and then identify the size of the original document 5 Touch Copy to and then touch M
184. g has no effect on PCL or PPDS emulation print jobs Lets the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when not resolved within the specified time period Notes Disabled is the factory default setting e 5 255 is a range of time in seconds Specifies whether the printer reprints jammed pages Notes e Auto is the factory default setting The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks e On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages Lets the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed otherwise Notes e Off is the factory default setting Off prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page e On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the entire page prints Understanding printer menus 183 Menu item Description Factory Defaults Returns the printer settings to the factory default settings Do Not Restore Notes Restore Now Do Not Restore is the factory default setting Do Not Restore keeps the user defined settings Restore returns all printer settings to the factory default settings except Network Ports menu settings All downloads stored in RAM are deleted Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected Copy Settings menu Menu item Description
185. ge top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation Content Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax Text Notes Text Photo Photograph e Text is used when the document is mostly text e Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art e Photograph is used when the document is a high quality photograph or inkjet print Darkness Lightens or darkens the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Dial Prefix A numeric entry field is provided to enter numbers Dialing Prefix Rules Prefix Rule lt x gt Establishes a dialing prefix rule Automatic Redial 0 9 Redial Frequency 1 200 Behind a PABX Off On Enable ECM On Off Enable Fax Scans On Off Driver to fax On Off Specifies the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number Note 5 is the factory default setting Specifies the number of minutes between redials Enables switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone Enables Error Correction Mode for fax jobs Lets you send faxes by scanning at the printer Allows driver to fax jobs to be sent by the printer Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Lets you save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer Understanding printer menus Menu item Dial Mode Tone Pulse Max Speed 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 Custom Job scanning On Off Scan Preview On Off
186. ge specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a parallel port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes Onis the factory default setting e When the Off setting is used the printer does not examine incoming data e When the Off setting is used the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off Understanding printer menus Menu item NPA Mode On Off Auto 168 Description Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes Auto is the factory default setting e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Parallel Buffer Disabled Auto 3K to lt max size allowed gt Sets the size of the parallel input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting e The Disabled setting turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1K increments e The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other li
187. ght Make sure the guides in the paper trays multipurpose feeder or envelope feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly against the paper or envelopes Push all trays in firmly after loading paper Paper recommendations Use only recommended paper or specialty media For more information see Paper types and weights supported by the printer on page 82 Do not load wrinkled creased damp bent or curled paper Flex fan and straighten paper before loading it Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Do not mix paper sizes weights or types in the same stack Make sure all sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus Store paper per the manufacturer s recommendations Envelope recommendations To reduce wrinkling use the Envelope Enhance menu in the Paper menu Do not feed envelopes that Have excessive curl or twist Have windows holes perforations cutouts or embossing Have metal clasps string ties or folding bars Have an interlocking design Have postage stamps attached Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position Have bent corners Have rough cockle or laid finishes Are stuck together or damaged in any way Clearing jams 132 Understanding jam numbers and locations When a jam occurs a message indicating the jam location appears Open doors and covers and remove trays to
188. gs Information guide Provides help in locating additional information Print defects guide Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints Supplies guide Provides part numbers for ordering supplies Understanding printer messages 223 Understanding printer messages List of status and error messages Answering The printer is answering a fax call Wait for the message to clear Busy Wait for the message to clear Call complete A fax call is completed Wait for the message to clear Change lt src gt to lt x gt lt src gt is a tray or feeder and lt x gt is a paper size or type You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job The formatted page will print on the paper loaded in the selected tray This may cause clipping of text or images Try one or more of the following e Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type e Touch Use current src to ignore the message and print from the tray selected for the print job e Touch Continue to continue the job if the correct size and type are loaded in the tray and this size and type are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu Note If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray the job is not continued Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job Check tray lt x gt connection Try one or more of the following e Turn the printer off and then back on If the error occurs a
189. harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment Notices 294 Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information Regulatory notices for wireless products This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters for example but not limited to wireless network cards or proximity card readers Exposure to radio frequency radiation The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies A minimum separation of 20 cm 8 inches must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory age
190. he Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com MAKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED USB SERIAL OR ETHERNET CABLE For more information visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer Confidential and other held jobs do not print These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following PARTIAL JOB NO JOB OR BLANK PAGES PRINT The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data Delete the print job and then print it again e For PDF documents recreate the PDF and then print it again Troubleshooting 257 MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them Job takes longer than expected to print These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB Eliminate the number and size of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the job CHANGE THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING TO OFF m Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears On the home screen touch Touch Settings Touch General Settings Touch the down arrow until Print Recovery appears Touch Print Recovery Touch the right arrow next to Page Protect until
191. he address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Click Manage Shortcuts Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password get one from your system support person 4 Click Fax Shortcut Setup 5 Type a unique name for the shortcut and then enter the fax number To create a multiple number shortcut enter the fax numbers for the group Note Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon 6 Assign a shortcut number If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 7 Click Add Faxing 115 Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Onthe home screen touch Fax 4 Enter the fax number To create a group of fax numbers touch Next number and then enter the next fax number 5 Touch Save as Shortcut 6 Enter a name for the shortcut 7 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK If the name or number is incorrect the
192. he link buffers are set to Auto and then exit the menus to activate the link buffer changes When Ready appears enable Resource Save e Install additional memory 37 Insufficient memory to collate job Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job e Cancel the current print job 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing e Delete fonts macros and other data in printer memory e Install additional printer memory 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs Touch Continue to clear the message 37 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the printer hard disk Touch Continue to clear the message Understanding printer messages 234 38 Memory full Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message e Cancel the current print job Install additional printer memory 39 Complex page some data may not have printed Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing e Cancel the current print job e Install additional printer memory 42 xy Cartridge region
193. her input port e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Mac Binary PS On Off Auto Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Notes Auto is the factory default setting e The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol ee The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs Understanding printer menus Menu item Std Network Setup Reports or Network Reports Network Card TCP IP IPv6 AppleTalk NetWare LexLink Net lt x gt Setup Reports or Network Reports Network Card TCP IP IPv6 Wireless AppleTalk NetWare LexLink Description For descriptions and settings of the network setup menus see the following Network Reports menu on page 161 Network Card menu on page 161 TCP IP menu on page 162 IPv6 menu on page 163 Wireless menu on page 163 AppleTalk menu on page 164 NetWare menu on page 164 LexLink menu on page 165 Note The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network 160 SMTP Setup menu Use the following menu to configure the SMTP server Primary SMTP Gateway Primary SMTP Gateway Port Secondary SMTP Gateway Secondary SMTP Gateway Port Specifies SMTP server port information Note 25 is the default SMTP gateway port Menu item
194. hich Lexmark is legally liable IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS LOST SAVINGS INCIDENTAL DAMAGE OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark Lexmark s and its Suppliers and Remarketers limitations of remedies are not cumulative Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation Additional rights Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights that vary from state to state Patent acknowledgment The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography ECC Cipher Suites for Transport Layer Security TLS implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for TLS El
195. i K esolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International Inc et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999 5 EU p hin uetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele s tetele Suomi Lexmark International Inc vakuuttaa t ten ett t m tuote on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sit koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen Fran ais Par la pr sente Lexmark International Inc d clare que l appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE Magyar Alul rott Lexmark International Inc nyilatkozom hogy a term k megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b eldirasainak slenska H r me l sir Lexmark International Inc yfir v a essi vara er samr mi vid grunnkr fur og a rar kr fur sem ger ar eru tilskipun 1999 5 EC Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International Inc dichiara che questo questo prodotto conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latviski Ar o Lexmark International Inc deklar ka is izstr d jums atbilst Direkt vas 1999 5 EK b tiskaj m pras b m un citiem ar to saist tajiem noteikumiem Lietuvi iuo Lexmark International Inc deklaruoja kad is produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB direktyvos nuostatas Malti Bil pre enti Lexmark International Inc
196. ible power consumption mode Off The product is plugged into a wall outlet but the power switch is turned 110V 0 15W 220V 1 25W off Notices 289 The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time averaged measurements Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average Values are subject to change See www lexmark com for current values Power Saver This product is designed with an energy saving mode called Power Saver The Power Saver Mode is equivalent to the EPA Sleep Mode The Power Saver Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity The Power Saver Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time called the Power Saver Timeout Factory default Power Saver Timeout for this product in minutes 110V 45 minutes 220V 60 minutes By using the configuration menus the Power Saver Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 240 minutes Setting the Power Saver Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption but may increase the response time of the product Setting the Power Saver Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response but uses more energy Off mode If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power then to completely stop product power consumption disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet Total energy usage It is sometim
197. iginal document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Fax Use the keypad to enter the fax number Touch Options From the Darkness area touch the arrows to adjust the darkness of the fax Touch Fax It Faxing 117 Sending a fax at a scheduled time 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Fax Enter the fax number using the numbers on the touch screen or keypad Touch Options Touch Advanced Options Nn oO WwW A VUN Touch Delayed Send Note If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server the Delayed Send button will not appear Faxes waiting for transmission are listed in the Fax Queue 8 Touch the arrows to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes If the current time is shown the left arrow is unavailable 9 Touch Done 10 Touch
198. imits the amount of time a confidential job stays in the printer before it is deleted Off Notes 1 hour 4 hours e Off is the default setting 24 hours e If the Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential jobs reside on the LWwe k printer RAM or printer hard disk the expiration time for those print jobs does not change to the new default value e If the printer is turned off all confidential jobs held in printer RAM are deleted Disk Wiping menu Menu item Description Automatic Wiping Off On Manual Wiping Start now Do not start now ee Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system from the printer hard disk All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Automatic Wiping marks all disk space used by a previous job and does not permit the file system to reuse this space until it has been sanitized Only Automatic Wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to take the printer offline for an extended amount of time Notes e This menu item appears only if a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed e Off is the default setting Due to the large amount of resources required for Automatic Wiping activating this option may decrease printer performance especially if the printer requires hard disk space faster than it can be wiped and returned to service Disk Wiping erase
199. inal document Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Scan edge to edge Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Off ee On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Sharpness Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image 0 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Use cc bcc Enables the use of the cc and bcc fields On Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 202 FTP Settings menu Description Format Specifies the format of the FTP file PDF pdf Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting Secure PDF TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps PDF Version Sets the version level of the PDF file for FTP 1 2 1 6 Note 1 5 is the factory default setting Content Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to FTP Text Photo Notes Photograph Text e Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art Photograph is used when the document is a high quality photograph or inkjet print Text is used when the document is mostly text Color Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color Gray Note Gray is the factory default setting Color Resolution Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned 75 Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting 150 200 300
200. ing The N stands for Number For example 2 up would print two pages of your document on a single page and 4 up would print four pages of your document ona single page Touching Print Page Borders adds or removes the outline border surrounding the original document pages on the output page Advanced Imaging This option lets you adjust Background Removal Contrast Shadow Detail Scan Edge to Edge Color Balance and mirror image before you copy the document Custom Job This option combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job Separator Sheets This option places a blank piece of paper between copies pages and print jobs The separator sheets can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on Margin Shift This option increases the size of the margin a specified distance This can be useful in providing space to bind or hole punch copies Use the increase or decrease arrows to set how much of a margin you want If the additional margin is too large then the copy will be cropped Edge Erase This option eliminates smudges or information around the edges of your document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase erases whatever is within the selected area leaving nothing printed on that portion of the paper Header Footer This option turns on the Date Time Page number Bates number o
201. ing supplies on page 246 For more information on label printing characteristics and design see the Card Stock amp Label Guide at http support lexmark com When printing on labels Feed labels from a 250 sheet tray a 550 sheet tray or the multipurpose feeder e Use labels designed specifically for laser printers Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that The labels can withstand temperatures up to 230 C 446 F without sealing excessive curling wrinkling or releasing hazardous emissions Label adhesives face sheet printable stock and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi 172 kPa pressure without delaminating oozing around the edges or releasing hazardous fumes e Do not use labels with slick backing material e Use full label sheets Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing resulting in a jam Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive and could void the printer and cartridge warranties e Do not use labels with exposed adhesive e Do not print within 1 mm 0 04 in of the edge of the label of the perforations or between die cuts of the label Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm 0 04 in away from edges is recommended Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty e f zone coating of the adhesive is not possible remove a 1 6 mm 0 06 in s
202. ingMT Light 220 Menu item Description Font Size Sets the default font size for HTML documents 1 255 pt Notes 12 ptis the factory default setting e Font size can be increased in 1 point increments Scale Scales the default font for HTML documents 1 400 Notes e 100 is the factory default setting e Scaling can be increased in 1 increments Orientation Sets the page orientation for HTML documents Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Margin Size Sets the page margin for HTML documents 8 255 mm Notes e 19 mm is the factory default setting e Margin size can be increased in 1 mm increments Understanding printer menus 221 Menu item Description Backgrounds Specifies whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents Do Not Print Note Print is the factory default setting Print Image menu Menu item Description Auto Fit Selects the optimal paper size scaling and orientation On Notes Off Onis the factory default setting e The On setting overrides scaling and orientation settings for some images Invert Inverts bi tonal monochrome images On Notes Off e Off is the factory default setting e The font size can be increased in 1 point increments e This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images Scaling Scales the image to fit the selected paper size Anchor Top Left Notes Best Fit Anchor Center Best Fit is the factory default setting Fit
203. int If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options From the print options or Copies amp Pages pop up menu choose Job Routing Select your job type Confidential Reserve Repeat or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential job also enter a four digit PIN Click OK or Print and then go to the printer to release the job 5 Onthe home screen touch Held jobs Touch your user name Note A maximum of 500 results can be displayed for held jobs If your name does not appear touch the down arrow until your name appears or touch Search Held Jobs if there are a large number of held jobs in the printer Touch Confidential Jobs Enter your PIN 9 Touch the job you want to print 10 Touch Print or touch the arrows to increase or decrease the number of copies and then touch Print Printing 90 Printing from a mobile device For the list of supported mobile devices and to download a compatible mobile printing application visit http lexmark com mobile Note Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer Printing from a flash drive A USB port is located on the printer control panel Insert a flash drive to print supported file types Supported file types include pdf gif jpeg jog omp png tiff tif pcx and dcx Many flash drives are tested and approved for use with the printer For more information visit the Lexmark Web site a
204. ion Enables duplex printing two sided printing Enables stapling Note Off is the factory default setting Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the Long Edge page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page Short Edge Notes Long Edge is the factory default setting Long Edge specifies that binding be placed on the left edge of portrait pages and the top edge of landscape pages Short Edge specifies that binding be placed on the top edge of portrait pages and the left edge of landscape pages Orientation Specifies the orientation of the print job Auto Note Auto is the factory default setting Portrait Landscape N up pages side Off Specifies that multiple page images be printed on one side of a sheet of paper This is also referred to as Paper Saver 2 Up Notes 3 Up 4 Up e Offis the factory default setting 6 Up e The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up N up Border Prints a border around each page image when using N up None Note None is the factory default setting Solid N up Ordering Horizontal Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical Vertical Specifies the positioning of multiple page images when using N up Notes e Horizontal is the factory default setting e Positioning depends on the number of images and whether the images are in portrait or landscape orientation Separator
205. items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Onthe home screen touch Copy 4 Touch Options 5 Touch Header Footer 6 Pick an area of the page to place the date and time 7 Touch Date Time and then touch Continue 8 Touch Done 9 Touch Copy It Placing an overlay message on each page An overlay message can be placed on each page The message choices are Urgent Confidential Copy or Draft To place a message on the copies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 Touch Options Copying 102 5 Touch Overlay 6 Touch the button containing the overlay you want to use 7 Touch Done 8 Touch Copy It Canceling a copy job Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF When the ADF begins processing a document the scanning screen appears To cancel the copy job touch Cancel Job on the touch screen A Canceling scan job screen appears The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job Cancelin
206. ixed paper sizes into a single job Scan Preview On Off Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item Allow Save as Shortcut On Off 201 Description Lets you save e mail addresses as shortcuts Notes e Off is the factory default setting e When set to Off the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the E mail Destination screen Background Removal 4 to 4 Auto Center On Off Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Lets you automatically center the copy on the page Note Off is the factory default setting Specifies which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Contrast 0 5 Best for content Specifies the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Mirror Image On Off Negative Image On Off Shadow Detail 0 4 Creates a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Creates a negative image of the orig
207. l Notes Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical e Horizontal is the factory default setting Vertical e Positioning depends on the number of images and whether the images are in portrait or landscape orientation Orientation Specifies the orientation of a multiple page sheet Auto Note Auto is the factory default setting The printer chooses between portrait and Landscape landscape Portrait Understanding printer menus 214 Menu item Description N up Border Prints a border around each page image when using N up pages sides None Note None is the factory default setting Solid Staple Job Specifies whether print jobs are stapled Off Notes On e This menu item is available only when the StapleSmart Finisher is installed e Off is the factory default setting Print jobs are not stapled Envelopes are not stapled Offset Pages Stacks copies or print jobs into staggered sets in an output bin off Notes Between Jobs w ni Between Copies e This menu item appears only when the StapleSmart Finisher is installed e Off is the factory default setting No pages are offset during the print job Between Jobs offsets each print job Between Copies offsets each copy of a print job Quality menu Menu item Description Print Resolution Specifies the printed output resolution 300 dpi Note 600 dpi is the factory default setting The printer driver default is 1200 IQ 600 dpi 1200 dpi 1200 Imag
208. l computers that access the printer must be updated with this new IP address Notes e ifthe printer has a static IP address then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations f the computers are configured to use the network name instead of an IP address then you do not need to make any changes to your computer configurations e f you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet connection then make sure the printer is disconnected from the Ethernet network when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly If the printer is connected to the Ethernet network then the wireless configuration completes but the wireless ISP is inactive To activate the wireless ISP disconnect the printer from the Ethernet network turn off the printer and then turn it back on e Only one network connection is active at a time To switch between Ethernet and wireless connection types turn off the printer connect the cable to switch to an Ethernet connection or disconnect the cable to switch to a wireless connection and then turn the printer back on For Windows users 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer control panel The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web p
209. l paper sizes 1 Appears only if Tray Size Sensing is turned off Note Only installed trays drawers and feeders are listed in this menu lt Understanding printer menus Menu item Tray lt x gt Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Paper Custom Type lt x gt MP Feeder Size A4 AS A6 JIS BS Letter Legal Executive Oficio Folio Statement Universal 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope Other Envelope 145 Description Specifies the type of paper loaded in each tray Notes e Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1 Custom Type lt x gt is the factory default setting for all other trays e If available a user defined name will appear instead of Custom Type lt x gt e Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type settings match then the trays are automatically linked When one tray is empty the job prints using the linked tray Specifies the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder Notes From the Paper menu Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for MP Feeder Size to appear as a menu item e A4 is the international factory default setting Letter is the US factory default setting The multipurpose feeder does not au
210. lears when all blocks are cleared Sending page lt n gt The printer sends page lt n gt of the fax job where lt n gt is the number of the page sent Wait for the message to clear Serial lt x gt The printer is using a serial cable connection The serial port is the active communication link Set clock The clock is not set This message appears if no other fax status message appears It remains until the clock is set SMTP server not set up Contact system administrator An error occurred on the SMTP server or the SMTP server is not configured properly Touch Continue to clear the message If the message appears again contact your system support person Understanding printer messages 232 Some held jobs were not restored Touch Continue to delete the specified job Note Some held jobs are not restored They stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible System busy preparing resources for job Not all resources needed for the job are available Wait for the message to clear System busy preparing resources for job Deleting held job s Not all resources needed for the job are available Some held jobs are deleted to free system memory Wait for the message to clear Unsupported disk An unsupported printer hard disk has been installed Remove the unsupported device and then install a supported one Unsupported USB device please remove Remove the unrecognized USB device Unsupported USB hub please remove
211. lected the multipurpose feeder can be used only for manual feed print jobs e If paper is loaded in the multipurpose feeder and First is selected then paper always feeds from the multipurpose feeder first Understanding printer menus Envelope Enhance 148 The envelope conditioner significantly reduces the wrinkling of some envelopes Envelope Enhance Off 1 Least 2 3 4 5 6 Most Substitute Size menu Menu item Substitute Size Off Statement A5 Letter A4 All Listed Paper Texture menu Menu item Plain Texture Smooth Normal Rough Card Stock Texture Smooth Normal Rough Transparency Texture Smooth Normal Rough a E E E S Menu item Description Enables or disables the envelope conditioner Notes e The factory default setting is 5 e If noise reduction is more important than wrinkle reduction then decrease the setting A E Description Substitutes a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available Notes e All Listed is the factory default setting All available substitutions are allowed e The Off setting indicates no size substitutions are allowed e Setting a substitution lets the job print without a Change Paper message appearing Description Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Specifies the relative texture of the card stock loaded in
212. length guide tab inward as shown and slide the guide to the correct position for the paper size being loaded Notes e Use the size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides e For standard paper sizes lock the length guide 4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 5 Load the paper stack e Print side facedown for single sided printing Print side faceup for duplex printing Note Paper must be loaded differently in the trays if an optional StapleSmart II Finisher is installed Loading paper and specialty media 67 Without an optional StapleSmart II Finisher With an optional StapleSmart II Finisher Single sided printing Single sided printing Duplex two sided printing Duplex two sided printing Note Notice the maximum fill line on the side of the tray which indicates the maximum height for loading paper Do not overload the tray 6 If necessary adjust the paper guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack and lock the length guide for the paper sizes indicated on the tray Loading paper and specialty media 68 7 Insert the tray 8 Ifa different type of paper was loaded than the type previously loaded in the tray then change the Paper Type setting for the tray from the printer control panel Loading the 2000 sheet tray 1 Pull the tray out 2 Pull up and s
213. let used in your location 2 Connect the telephone line of your chosen telecommunications equipment to the left outlet of the adapter Additional printer setup 55 If your telecommunications equipment uses a US style RJ11 telephone line follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Remove the plug from the EXT port on the back of the printer Note Once this plug is removed any country or region specific equipment you connect to the printer by way of the adapter as shown will not function properly Warning Potential Damage Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax Additional printer setup 56 Country region Saudi Arabia e Israel e United Arab Emirates e Hungary e Egypt e Poland Bulgaria Romania e Czech Republic e Russia Belgium e Slovenia e Australia e Spain e South Africa Turkey e Greece To connect a telephone an answering machine or other telecommunications equipment to the printer 1 Remove the plug from the back of the printer Note Once this plug is removed any country or region specific equipment that you connect to the printer by way of the adapter as shown will not function properly Additional printer setup 57 Country region Germany e Austria e Switzerland There is a plug installed in the EXT port of the printer This plug is necessary for the proper functioning of the printer Note Do
214. lide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size being loaded Loading paper and specialty media 69 3 Unlock the length guide 4 Push the length guide release latch to raise the length guide slide the guide to the correct position for the paper size being loaded and then lock the guide Loading paper and specialty media 70 5 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 6 Load the paper stack e Print side facedown for single sided printing e Print side faceup for duplex printing Note Paper must be loaded differently in the trays if an optional StapleSmart II Finisher is installed Without an optional StapleSmart II Finisher With an optional StapleSmart II Finisher Single sided printing Single sided printing Loading paper and specialty media Without an optional StapleSmart II Finisher With an optional StapleSmart II Finisher Duplex two sided printing Duplex two sided printing Note Notice the maximum fill line on the side of the tray which indicates the maximum height for loading paper Do not overload the tray 7 Insert the tray 71 Loading paper and specialty media 72 Loading the multipurpose feeder 1 Pull down the multipurpose feeder door 4 Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading
215. liptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA 256 382 and AES Galois Counter Mode GCM implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security TLS implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security TLS implemented in the product or service The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for AES CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital Signature Algorithm ECDSA implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemen
216. lity but the file size is very large e This menu item applies to all scan functions Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to FTP job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes On is the factory default setting e This menu item applies to all scan functions Understanding printer menus Menu item 204 Description Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Log Paper Source Tray lt x gt Manual Feeder Manual Env MP Feeder Specifies whether the transmission log prints Note Print log is the factory default setting Specifies a paper source for FTP logs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Log Output Bin Standard Bin Bin lt x gt FTP bit Depth 8 bit 1 bit Base File Name Specifies an output bin for the FTP log Enables the Text Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Lets you enter a base file name Custom Job Scanning On Off Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job Scan Preview On Off Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Backgroun
217. ll scan functions Use Multi Page TIFF On Off Scan bit Depth 8 bit 1 bit Base File Name Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to USB job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes e Onis the factory default setting e This menu item applies to all scan functions Enables the Text Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Lets you enter a base file name Custom Job scanning Off On Scan Preview On Off Background Removal 4to 4 Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Auto Center On Off Lets you automatically center the copy on the page Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 208 Menu item Description Color Dropout Specifies which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease Color Dropout the dropout None Notes Red ee None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout Blue 128 is the factory default setting
218. m Job Job Build Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job e Transmission Log Prints the transmission log or transmission error log E mailing 112 Scan Preview Displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e mail When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Edge Erase Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Darkness Adjusts how light or dark your scanned e mails will turn out Faxing 113 Faxing Note Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models Scanner glass Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Use the ADF for multiple page documents Sending a fax Sending a fax using the printer control panel 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Onthe home s
219. m the ADF immediately after the last successfully scanned page Touch Scan from flatbed if page jam recovery is active Scanning resumes from the scanner glass immediately after the last successfully scanned page Touch Finish job without further scanning if page jam recovery is active The job ends at the last successfully scanned page but the job is not canceled Successfully scanned pages go to their destination copy fax e mail or FTP Touch Restart job if job recovery is active The message clears A new scan job containing the same parameters as the previous job starts Understanding printer messages 231 Replace wiper Replace the fuser wiper or try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Touch Ignore to clear the message but at the next power on the message appears again Restore Held Jobs Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored Scan Document Too Long The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages Touch Cancel Job to clear the message Scanner ADF Cover Open The ADF cover is open The message clears when the cover is closed Scanner Jam Access Cover Open Close the bottom ADF door to clear the message Securely clearing disk space The printer hard disk wiping process needs to recover The message c
220. media For more information see the chapter about paper and specialty media guidelines MAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the multipurpose feeder CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY e Load paper from a fresh package Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared CHECK THE PAPER PATH The paper path is not clear Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path and then touch Continue Page that jammed does not reprint after you clear the jam Turn ON Jam RECOVERY In the Setup menu Jam Recovery is set to Off Set Jam Recovery to Auto or On 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears On the home screen touch Touch Settings Touch General Settings Touch the down arrow until Print Recovery appears Touch Print Recovery Nn oO WwW A VUN Touch the right arrow next to Jam Recovery until On or Auto appears Troubleshooting 271 8 Touch Submit 9 Touch Solving print quality problems The information in the following topics may help you solve print quality problems If these suggestions still do not correct the problem contact Customer Support You may have a printer part that requires adjus
221. mismatch Install a print cartridge that matches the region number of the printer x indicates the value of the printer region y indicates the value of the cartridge region x and y can have the following values US Europe the Middle East and Africa Asia Latin America OlRPI wil ni rw Invalid region 50 PPDS font error Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing e The printer cannot find a requested font From the PPDS menu select Best Fit and then select On The printer will find a similar font and reformat the affected text e Cancel the current print job 51 Defective flash detected Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing e Cancel the current print job Understanding printer messages 235 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted e Delete fonts macros and other data stored in flash memory e Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card 53 Unformatted flash detected Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing Format the flash memory If the error message remains the flash memory may be defective and require replacing 54
222. mote Logins Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from a computer before Login failures all remote users are locked out Failure time frame Notes Lockout time AG e Login failures specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are Login timeout locked out Settings range from 1 50 3 attempts is the factory default setting e Failure time frame specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out Settings range from 1 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting e Lockout time specifies how long a user is locked out after exceeding the login failures limit Settings range from 0 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting 0 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time e Login timeout specifies how long the remote interface remains idle before automatically logging the user off Settings range from 1 900 seconds 300 seconds is the factory default setting Confidential Print menu Menu item Description Max Invalid PIN Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered Off Notes 2 10 e Off is the default setting e This menu item appears only if a printer hard disk is installed e Once a limit is reached the jobs for that user name and that PIN are deleted j e A E A A A A AE Understanding printer menus Menu item Job Expiration 173 Description L
223. n and then navigate to Apps list gt Run gt type control printers gt OK In Windows 7 or earlier a Click t or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run dialog type control printers c Press Enter or click OK 2 Double click the printer icon 3 Select the print job you want to cancel 4 Click Delete For Macintosh users 1 From the Apple menu navigate to either of the following System Preferences gt Print amp Scan gt select your printer gt Open Print Queue System Preferences gt Print amp Fax gt select your printer gt Open Print Queue 2 From the printer window select the print job you want to cancel and then delete it Copying 93 Copying Scanner glass Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Use the ADF for multiple page documents Making copies Making a quick copy 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the printer control panel press 4 Ifyou placed the document on the scanner glass then touch Finish the Job to
224. n r patroner fjernes og sp rreanordningen er sl et fra Undg at blive udsat for laserstr len GEVAAR Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser DANGER Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du d verrouillage des loquets Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser VAARA N kym t nt lasersateilya on varottava kun v rikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki V lt lasersateelle altistumista GEFAHR Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre Laserstrahl meiden KINAYNOS Ek uon adopatns aktiwoBoAias laser Kata tnv adaipEon Twv KACETWV Kar THV anaop ion THs LavSdAWOnNs Anope yete tnv EKBEON otnv aktwo o ia laser VESZ LY Nem l that l zersugarzas fordulhat eld a patronok elt vol t sakor s a zardszerkezet felbont sakor Kertilje a l zersugarnak val kitetts get PERICOLO Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco Evitare l esposizione al raggio laser FARE Usynlig laserstraling nar kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill Unng eksponering for laserstralen NIEBEZPIECZE STWO niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady Nale y unika na wietlenia promieniem lasera ONACHO Hesugumoe na3epHoe n3nyyeHne Npr N3BNEYEHHbIX KapTpn xax n CHATUNM 6noknpoBskn U36er
225. n touch Cancel and then reenter the information If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 8 Touch Fax It to send the fax or touch to return to the home screen Using shortcuts and the address book Using fax shortcuts Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine You can assign shortcut numbers when creating permanent fax destinations Permanent fax destinations or speed dial numbers are created in the Manage Shortcuts link located under Settings on the Embedded Web Server A shortcut number 1 99999 can contain a single recipient or multiple recipients By creating a group fax shortcut with a shortcut number you can quickly and easily fax broadcast information to an entire group 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not place postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Press and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad Using the address book Note If the address book feature is not enabled then contact your system support person 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos
226. n Adobe Acrobat Click the printer icon The Print dialog appears Select Print as image 4 Click OK Error message about reading USB drive appears Make sure the USB drive is supported For information regarding tested and approved USB flash memory devices visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Troubleshooting 256 Jobs do not print These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT Make sure Ready or Power Saver appears on the display before sending a job to print CHECK TO SEE IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin CHECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY Load paper in the tray MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED e Verify that you are using the correct printer software e f you are using a USB port make sure you are running a supported operating system and using compatible printer software MIAKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS INSTALLED PROPERLY AND WORKING e Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network e Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected If the status is Not Connected check the network cables and then try printing the network setup page again Contact your system support person to make sure the network is functioning correctly Copies of the printer software are also available on t
227. n the front of the printer The Held Jobs screen appears 4 Touch Scan to USB drive 5 Select the scan settings 6 Touch Scan It Understanding scan profile options Quick Setup This option lets you select preset formats or customize the scan job settings You can select one of these settings Custom Photo Color JPEG Text BW PDF Photo Color TIFF Text BW TIFF Text Photo BW PDF Text Photo Color PDF To customize the scan job settings from the Quick Setup menu select Custom Then change the scan settings as needed Scanning to a computer or flash drive 129 Format Type This option sets the output PDF JPEG TIFF SECURE PDF or XPS for the scanned image PDF Creates a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com JPEG Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs TIFF Creates multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG Secure PDF Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access XPS Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a
228. ncies Industry Canada Canada This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada To prevent radio interference to the licensed service this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding Equipment or its transmit antenna that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population consult Safety Code 6 obtainable from Health Canada s Web site www hc sc gc ca rpb The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met Industry Canada Canada Cet appareil est conforme a la norme RSS 210 d Industry Canada Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes Notices 295 1 cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d interf rences et 2 il doit accepter toute interf rence recue y compris celles risquant d alt rer son fonctionnement Cet a
229. nderstanding printer menus Menu item Delete Log Delete now Do not delete Configure Log Enable Audit Enable Remote Syslog Remote Syslog Facility Severity of events to log 175 Description Specifies whether audit logs are deleted Note Delete Now is the factory default setting Specifies whether and how the audit logs are created Note Factory default settings enable the security audit log Set Date Time menu Menu item View Date Time Description Lets you view the current date and time settings for the printer Set Date Time lt input date time gt Time Zone lt list of time zones gt Observe DST On Off Enable NTP On Off Note Date Time is set in YYYY MM DD HH MM format Note GMT is the factory default setting Note On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time associated with the Time Zone setting Enables Network Time Protocol which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a network Note On is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 176 Settings menu General Settings menu Menu item Description Display Language Sets the language of the text appearing on the display English Note All languages may not be available for all printers Francais Deutsch Italiano Espanol Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Portuguese Suomi Russian Polski Magyar Turkce Cesky Simplified Chinese
230. ng CHECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY Load paper in the tray CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone line rings before the printer answers If you have extension phones on the same line as the printer or subscribe to the telephone company s Distinctive Ring service then keep the Ring Delay setting at 4 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Settings Click Fax Settings Click Analog Fax Setup In the Rings to Answer box enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before answering ao uu A VU N Click Submit Troubleshooting 266 THE TONER MAY BE LOW 88 Cartridge low appears when the toner is low Can receive but not send faxes These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE PRINTER IS NOT IN FAX MODE On the home screen touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode THE DOCUMENT IS NOT LOADED PROPERLY Load the original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass MAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY
231. ng from computer 92 print quality cleaning the scanner glass 242 print quality test pages printing 91 print quality troubleshooting blank pages 271 characters have jagged edges 272 clipped images 272 ghost images 273 gray background 273 poor transparency quality 282 print irregularities 275 print is too dark 278 print is too light 277 print quality test pages 271 repeating defects 276 skewed print 276 solid black streaks 277 solid color pages 279 solid white streaks 277 streaked vertical lines 280 toner fog or background shading 280 toner rubs off 281 toner specks 281 print troubleshooting error reading USB drive 255 held jobs do not print 256 incorrect characters print 257 incorrect margins 274 jammed page does not reprint 270 job prints from wrong tray 257 job prints on wrong paper 257 job takes longer than expected 257 jobs do not print 256 Large jobs do not collate 258 multiple language PDFs do not print 255 paper curl 274 paper frequently jams 270 tray linking does not work 258 unexpected page breaks occur 258 printer configurations 10 minimum clearances 11 250 models 10 moving 249 250 selecting a location 11 setting up in new location 250 shipping 250 printer control panel 13 factory defaults restoring 253 printer hard disk installing 32 printer information where to find 9 printer messages 1565 Emulation error load emulation option 241 200 282 yy paper jam 239 283 Staple jam 239 290 294 yy scanner j
232. ng wrinkling curling excessively or releasing hazardous emissions For the best performance use envelopes made from 90 g m 24 Ib bond paper Use up to 105 g m 28 Ib bond weight for envelopes as long as the cotton content is 25 or less All cotton envelopes must not exceed 90 g m 24 lb bond weight Use only new envelopes To optimize performance and minimize jams do not use envelopes that Have excessive curl or twist Are stuck together or damaged in any way Have windows holes perforations cutouts or embossing Have metal clasps string ties or folding bars Have an interlocking design Have postage stamps attached Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position Printing 87 Have bent corners Have rough cockle or laid finishes e Adjust the width guide to fit the width of the envelopes Note A combination of high humidity over 60 and the high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes Tips on using labels Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities Notes Paper dual web paper polyester and vinyl labels are supported e When using the duplex unit specially designed integrated and dual web paper labels are supported e Printing labels requires a special label fuser cleaner which is included with the special cartridge required for label applications For more information see Order
233. nk buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off e To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer disable or reduce the size of the USB serial and network buffers e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Job Buffering Off On Auto Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing Notes e Off is the factory default setting e The Off setting does not buffer print jobs to the printer hard disk e The On setting buffers jobs on the printer hard disk The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Advanced Status On Off Protocol Standard Fastbytes S Enables bidirectional communication through the parallel port Notes On is the factory default setting e The Off setting disables parallel port negotiation Specifies the parallel port protocol Notes Fastbytes is the factory default setting It provides compatibility with most existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting e The Standard setting tries to resolve parallel port communication problems Understanding printer menus 169 Menu item Description Honor Init Determines whether or
234. not remove the plug If you remove it other telecommunications devices in your home such as telephones or answering machines may not work Connecting directly to a telephone wall jack in Germany Connect the printer directly to a telephone wall jack to send and receive faxes without using a computer Note In Germany and some other countries the printer ships with a special RJ 11 plug in the EXT port Do not remove the RJ 11 plug It is required for both the fax and telephone to work properly 1 Make sure you have a telephone cord provided with the product and a telephone wall jack 2 Connect one end of the telephone cord into the LINE port of the printer Additional printer setup 58 3 Connect the other end of the telephone cord into the N slot of an active telephone wall jack 4 Ifyou would like to use the same line for both fax and telephone communication connect a second telephone line not provided between the telephone and the F slot of an active telephone wall jack 5 Ifyou would like to use the same line for recording messages on your answering machine connect a second telephone line not provided between the answering machine and the other N slot of the telephone wall jack Additional printer setup 59 Connecting to a telephone Connect a telephone to the printer to use the fax line as a normal telephone line Then set up the printer wherever your telephone is located to make copies or to send and receive fax
235. nplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer You can customize your printer connectivity and memory capacity by adding optional cards The instructions in this section explain how to install the available cards you can also use them to locate a card for removal Available internal options e Memory cards Printer memory Flash memory Fonts e Firmware cards Bar Code and Forms IPDS and SCS TNe PrintCryption PRESCRIBE e Printer hard disk e Lexmark Internal Solutions Ports ISP RS 232 C Serial ISP Parallel 1284 B ISP MarkNet N8150802 11 b g n Wireless ISP MarkNet N8130 10 100 Fiber ISP MarkNet N8120 10 100 1000 Ethernet ISP e MarkNet N8110 V 34 Fax Card Additional printer setup 21 Accessing the system board to install internal options Note This operation requires a flathead screwdriver A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer 1 Open the system board door 2 Loosen the screw s on the system board c
236. nsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Note To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations Industry Canada compliance statement This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Standard ICES 003 Avis de conformit aux normes de l industrie du Canada Cet appareil num rique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux quipements pouvant causer des interf rences NMB 003 European Community EC directives conformity This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC and 2006 95 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility and safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized repres
237. nsitive information Notes Help is automatically installed with the printer software The printer software is located in the printer program folder or on the desktop depending on your operating system Learning about the printer What are you looking for The latest supplemental information updates and customer support e Documentation Driver downloads e Live chat support E mail support e Voice support 10 Find it here Lexmark Support Web site http support lexmark com Note Select your country or region and then select your product to view the appropriate support site Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for your country or region can be found on the Support Web site or on the printed warranty that came with your printer Record the following information located on the store receipt and at the back of the printer and have it ready when you contact customer support so that they may serve you faster e Machine Type number Serial number Date purchased Store where purchased Warranty information Printer configurations Warranty information varies by country or region Inthe US See the Statement of Limited Warranty included with this printer or at http support lexmark com In other countries and regions See the printed warranty that came with your printer Note Printer configuration may vary depending on your printer model
238. nt supply item is needed or when maintenance is required Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears 2 On the home screen touch Status Supplies Note If Status Supplies is not on the home screen then print a menu settings page to review the status of the supplies Checking the status of supplies from a network computer Note The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Device Status The Device Status page appears displaying a summary of supply levels Maintaining the printer 246 Ordering supplies To order parts and supplies in the U S contact Lexmark at 1 800 539 6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies dealers in your area In other countries or regions visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com or contact the place where you purchased the printer Note All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter or A4 size plain paper Ordering print cartridges When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the print becomes faded 1 Remove the print cartridge 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute toner Ze 3 Reinsert the cartridge and continue p
239. ntent 6 Touch the button that best represents what you are copying Text Used for original documents that are mostly text or line art e Text Photo Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures e Photograph Used when the original document is a high quality photograph or inkjet print Printed Image Used when copying halftone photographs graphics such as documents printed on a laser printer or pages from a magazine or newspaper that are composed primarily of images 7 Touch Done 8 Touch Copy It Collating copies If you print multiple copies of a document then you can choose to print each copy as a set collated or to print the copies as groups of pages not collated Collated Not collated 123 313 By default Collate is set to On If you do not want to collate your copies then change the setting to Off To turn collation off 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 Use the keypad to enter the number of copies Copying
240. nto the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Copy Select a duplex setting Touch Options Touch Paper Saver Select the desired output Copying 100 8 Touch Print Page Borders if you want a box drawn around each page of the copies 9 Touch Done 10 Touch Copy It Creating a custom job job build The custom job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job Each set may be scanned using different job parameters When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled the scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters and then it scans the next set with the same or different parameters The definition of a set depends on the scan source e if you scan a document on the scanner glass a set consists of one page e If you scan multiple pages using the ADF a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty e If you scan one page using the ADF a set consists of one page For example 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Copy Touch Options Touch Custom Job Touch On Touch D
241. ocument faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch E mail Type an e mail address Touch Options Touch Subject Type the e mail subject Touch Done O on U A W N Touch Message me o Type an e mail message ma ma Touch Done me N Touch E mail It Changing the output file type 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch E mail 4 Type an e mail address 5 Touch Options 6 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send e PDF Creates a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com Secure PDF Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access TIFF Creates multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the
242. olored Weight Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Light Weight Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray Light Heavy Weight Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray Heavy Rough Weight Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Custom lt x gt Specifies the relative weight of the custom paper type loaded in a specific tray Light Notes Normal Heavy e Normal is the factory default setting Settings appear only if the custom type is supported Understanding printer menus Paper Loading menu Menu item Card Stock Loading Duplex Off Recycled Loading Duplex Off Labels Loading Duplex Off Vinyl Labels Loading Duplex Off 152 Description Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Card Stock as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Recycled as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Labels as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Vinyl Labels as the paper type Note Off is
243. om Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE directive The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European Union We encourage the recycling of our products If you have further questions about recycling options visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com for your local sales office phone number Product disposal Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste Consult your local authorities for disposal and recycling options Battery notice This product contains Perchlorate material Special handling may apply For more information go to http www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Notices 287 Static sensitivity notice This symbol identifies static sensitive parts Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the metal frame of the printer ENERGY STAR Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency EPA ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark ENERGY STAR Mercury statement This product contains mercury in the lamp lt 5mg Hg Disposal of mercury may be regulated due to environmental considerations For disposal or recycling information contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance www eiae org Temperature information
244. om multifunctionprinters SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Learning about the printer 9 Learning about the printer Finding information about the printer What are you looking for Find it here Initial setup instructions Setup documentation The setup documentation came with the printer and is also available on the Lexmark Web Connecting the printer site at http support lexmark com Installing the printer software Additional setup and instructions for using the printer User s Guide and Quick Reference Guide The guides are e Selecting and storing paper and specialty media available on the Software and Documentation CD For updates visit our Web site at http support lexmark com e Loading paper Configuring printer settings e Viewing and printing documents and photos e Setting up and using the printer software e Configuring the printer on a network Caring for and maintaining the printer Troubleshooting and solving problems Instructions for Networking Guide Open the Software and Documentation CD and then look for Printer and Software Documentation under the Pubs folder From the list of publications click the Networking Guide link Connecting the printer to an Ethernet network Troubleshooting printer connection problems Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help Opena printer software program or application and then click Help Click 2 to view context se
245. om the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network lt x gt gt Std Network Setup or Net lt x gt Setup gt LexLink menu Activate On Off View Nickname Activates LexLink support Note Off is the factory default setting Lets you view the assigned LexLink nickname Note The LexLink nickname can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Menu item Description Ee es Understanding printer menus Standard USB menu 166 Menu item Description PCL SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received On through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes On is the factory default setting e When the Off setting is used the printer does not examine incoming data e When the Off setting is used the printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch setting is On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch setting is Off PS SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received On through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes On is the factory default setting e When the Off setting is used the printer does not examine incoming data e When the Off setting is used the printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch setting is On It uses the default printer language speci
246. on a network Ethernet networking 47 installing printer on a wireless network using Macintosh 44 installing printer software adding options 41 installing printer software Windows 40 Internal Solutions Port changing port settings 50 installing 26 troubleshooting 269 Invalid PIN 226 IPv6 menu 163 J jams avoiding 131 locating doors and trays 132 locations 132 numbers 132 jams clearing 200 132 201 132 202 134 230 239 135 240 249 136 250 137 260 138 270 279 138 280 282 paper jams 138 283 staple jams 139 290 294 141 stapler 139 job interrupt 101 Job stored for delayed transmission 227 L labels tips on using 87 letterhead copying to 95 loading 2000 sheet tray 68 loading multipurpose feeder 72 loading trays 65 tips on using 85 LexLink menu 165 light indicator 13 Line busy 227 Index linking trays 75 Load lt src gt with lt x gt 227 Load manual feeder with lt x gt 227 Load staples 227 loading 2000 sheet tray 68 250 sheet tray standard or optional 65 550 sheet tray standard or optional 65 card stock 72 envelopes 72 74 letterhead in 2000 sheet tray 68 letterhead in multipurpose feeder 72 letterhead in trays 65 multipurpose feeder 72 transparencies 72 M maintenance kit ordering 247 memory card installing 23 troubleshooting 269 Memory full cannot print faxes 227 menu settings page printing 39 menus Active NIC 158 AppleTalk 164 Bin Setup 155 Confidential Print 17
247. on both sides e 2 sided to 1 sided The original page has printing on both sides The copied page will have printing on only one side For example if the original draft is three sheets of paper with an image on each side of each sheet then the copy is six sheets with only one image on one side of each sheet e 2 sided to 2 sided The original page has printing on both sides The copy mimics the original exactly Understanding printer menus Menu item Paper Saver Off 2 on 1 Portrait 2 on 1 Landscape 4 on 1 Portrait 4 on 1 Landscape 184 Description Sets two or four sheets of an original document together on the same page Note Off is the factory default setting Print Page Borders On Off Collate On Off Staple On Off Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x 6in 3x 5in Business Card Custom Scan Size lt x gt A4 AS Oficio Mexico A6 JIS BS Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Letter Legal Copy To Source Tray lt x gt Single Sheet Feeder Multi Sheet Feeder Auto Size Match Specifies whether a border is printed around the edge of the page at the margins Note On is the factory default setting Keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when making multiple copies of the job Note On is the factory default setting Enables stapling Note Off is the factory default setting Specifies the paper size of the original document Speci
248. on the long edge or short edge side Scanning to an FTP address 125 Resolution This option adjusts the output quality of your file Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size Send As This option sets the output PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS for the scanned image PDF Creates a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com Secure PDF Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access TIFF Creates multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG JPEG Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs XPS Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer Content This option tells the printer the original document type Choose from Text Text Photo or Photo Color can be turned on or off with any of the Content choices Content affects the quality and size of your FTP file Text Emphasize sharp black high resolution text against a clean white
249. one on oOo UU A W N Touch Copy It When the end of a set is reached the scan screen appears 9 Load the next document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed Note If required change the job settings 10 If you have another document to scan load the next document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed Otherwise touch Finish the job Copying 101 Job interrupt Job interrupt pauses the current print job and lets you print copies Note The Job Interrupt setting must be On for this feature to function 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the printer control panel press K 4 If you placed the document on the scanner glass then touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen Placing information on copies Placing the date and time at the top of each page 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small
250. ontent provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling For detailed information on paper with recycled fiber content see Using recycled paper and other office papers on page 80 Unacceptable paper The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper also known as carbonless papers carbonless copy paper CCP or no carbon required NCR paper Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser Preprinted papers that require aregistration the precise print location on the page greater than 2 3 mm 0 9 in such as optical character recognition OCR forms In some cases registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms Coated papers erasable bond synthetic papers thermal papers Rough edged rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers Recycled papers that fail EN12281 2002 European Paper weighing less than 60 g m 16 Ib Multiple part forms or documents Selecting paper Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble free printing To help avoid jams and poor print quality Always use new undamaged paper Befor
251. or Color Dropout 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Contrast 0 5 Best for content Specifies the contrast used for the copy job Note Best for content is the factory default setting Mirror Image On Off Creates a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Negative Image Creates a negative image of the original document On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Shadow Detail Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy 0 4 Note 0 is the factory default setting Scan edge to edge Specifies if the original document is scanned edge to edge prior to copying On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Sharpness Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a copy 0 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Sample Copy Creates a sample copy of the original document On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Fax Settings menu Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup menu Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job by way of a telephone line Understanding printer menus General Fax Settings Menu item Fax Cover Page Fax Cover Page Off by default On by default Never Use Always Use Include To field On Off Include From field On Off From Include Message field On Off Message Include Logo On Off Include Footer lt x gt Footer lt x gt Station Name 189 Description Configures the fax cover page
252. or laser electrophotographic printing consult your paper supplier Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still cause paper feeding problems in any laser printer for example if the paper curls excessively under normal printing conditions Storing paper Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality For best results store paper where the temperature is 21 C 70 F and the relative humidity is 40 Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24 C 65 to 75 F with relative humidity between 40 and 60 e Store paper in cartons when possible on a pallet or shelf rather than on the floor Store individual packages on a flat surface e Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages Paper and specialty media guidelines Supported paper sizes types and weights The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the types of paper they support Note For an unlisted paper size configure a Universal Paper Size 81 For information on card stock and labels see the Card Stock amp Label Guide on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Paper sizes supported by the printer Paper size Dimensions 250 or 550 sheet trays standard or optional Optional Multipurpose 2000 sheet tray feeder Duplex unit i
253. ot applicable For Latin America Print cartridge X651A21L X651A11L High Yield Print Cartridge X651H21L X651H11L Extra High Yield Print Cartridge X654X21L X654X11L High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for Label Applications X651H04L Not applicable Extra High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for Label Applications X654X04L Not applicable Ordering a maintenance kit When 80 Routine maintenance needed appears order a maintenance kit The maintenance kit contains all the items necessary to replace the pick rollers the charge roll the transfer roller and the fuser Notes e Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit The charge roll fuser pick rollers and transfer roller can also be individually ordered and replaced as necessary To check the fuser type T1 or T2 installed in the printer remove the print cartridge to view the label on the fuser Part name Part number Maintenance kit 40X4723 100 V T1 fuser 40X4724 110 V T1 fuser 40X4765 220 V T1 fuser 40X4766 100 V T2 fuser 40X4767 110 V T2 fuser 40X4768 220 V T2 fuser Ordering a fuser To check the fuser type T1 or T2 installed in the printer remove the print cartridge to view the label on the fuser Maintaining the printer 248 Part number 40X1870 100 V 40X4418 110 V 40X1871 220 V 40X5853 100 V 40X5854 110 V 40X5855 220 V Part name
254. otes e Off is the factory default setting The On setting buffers jobs on the printer hard disk e The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Notes Auto is the factory default setting e The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs Sets the network address netmask or gateway information for an external print server that is attached to the printer using a USB cable Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Parallel lt x gt menu This menu appears only if an optional parallel card is installed Menu item PCL SmartSwitch On Off PS SmartSwitch On Off Description Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a parallel port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e Onis the factory default setting e When the Off setting is used the printer does not examine incoming data e When the Off setting is used the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer langua
255. ouching this button opens a PIN entry screen Entering the correct PIN locks the printer control panel touch screen and hard buttons Unlock Device This button appears on the screen when the printer is locked The printer control panel buttons and shortcuts cannot be used while it appears Touching this button opens a PIN entry screen Entering the correct PIN unlocks the printer control panel touch screen and hard buttons Learning about the printer Display item Cancel Jobs 16 Function Opens the Cancel Jobs screen The Cancel Jobs screen shows three headings Print Fax and Network The following items are available under the Print Fax and Network headings e Print job e Copy job Fax profile e FTP e E mail send Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can show only three jobs per screen Each job appears as a button which you can touch to access information about the job If more than three jobs exist in a column then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs Using the touch screen buttons Note Depending on your options and administrative setup your screens and buttons may vary from those shown Sample touch screen Button Home Copy from Sid es Duplex Letter 8 5x11 in 4 Copy to Letter 8 5x11 in Plain Paper Scale Darkness lt Auto D gt W n ed EJ
256. over gt i yj D ail Additional printer setup 22 3 Remove the system board cover 4 Use the illustration below to locate the appropriate connector Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors il Firmware and flash memory card connectors Memory card connector Lexmark Internal Solutions Port or printer hard disk connector 1 2 3 4 Fax card connector Additional printer setup 23 Installing a memory card Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board To install
257. ox Note This custom name will replace a custom type lt x gt name under the Custom Types and Paper Size Type menus Loading paper and specialty media 6 Click Submit 7 Click Custom Types Custom Types appears followed by your custom name 8 Select a Paper Type setting from the list next to your custom name 9 Click Submit 77 Paper and specialty media guidelines 78 Paper and specialty media guidelines Paper guidelines Selecting the correct paper or specialty media reduces printing problems For the best print quality try a sample of the paper or specialty media before buying large quantities Paper characteristics The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability Consider these factors when evaluating new paper stock Weight The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 176 g m 16 47 Ib bond grain long Paper lighter than 60 g m 16 Ib might not be stiff enough to feed properly and may cause paper jams For best performance use 75 g m 20 Ib bond grain long paper For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm 7 2 x 10 1 inches we recommend 90 g m 24 Ib or heavier paper Curl Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer where it is exposed to high temperatures Storing paper unwrapped in hot humid cold or dry conditions even in the trays can contribute to
258. per Type setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting e For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog Embedded Web Server does not open These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTIONS Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network CHECK THE NETWORK SETTINGS Depending on the network settings you may need to type https instead of http before the printer IP address to access the Embedded Web Server For more information see your system administrator Contacting customer support When you contact customer support describe the problem you are experiencing the printer control panel light sequence and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution You need to know your printer model type and serial number For more information see the label on the inside top front cover of the printer The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page Lexmark has various ways to help you solve your printing problem Visit the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com and then select one of the following Tech Library You can browse our library of manuals support documentation drivers and other downloads to help you solve common problems You can send an e mail to the Lexmark team
259. play is blank or displays only GiAMONAS ccccccessssssceceeceesessnseceeeceseesstsanes 255 Solving printing PrODIOMS c cccccccccecescecesessesssnenceseecesceececeseeeesnsaeseeseeceseeseseseusesasauausseesessusasaasaeaeess 255 SOIWING COPY o1 Ko IET AAEE T EEA A TEE EEEE 259 Solving scanner problem Sa araea earar rE cocdes cuz ciecencessa Gelsuessssuasasanskansessbecedevsvasvatasensstaiss cocewecaneraaiees 261 Solving fax problem Senen a a a a aa e E ae E Ea aah 263 Solving option problem Si ansiies eni ae e a e E TE E E e aoa aE a Ee 267 Solving paper feed ProblemMs cccsssccccecesccssessneeeceeecesesessueeeecesseessssseeceeeessssesnsaseeseseesesesas sesesnsaneess 270 Solving print quality PrODl M ccccccccessssssesnsneseseeceeceecessessesesseususaueceeceeeeseesseseseseeusausueseessasaueaeaness 271 Embedded Web Server does not OPen ccccceccesssssesssnsneananaeeceeceeececessesesessessnsauaueeseeceseeeeseesesesesnseness 282 Contacting Customer SUPPOMT cccecccccccneneseceeeccceaseessseeeeeceeeasausseeeceeessaaesssseeeeceeeasaaaseceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeges 282 Contents 6 NIG UIC OS E E S EE OR E E E TE EES 2 OO Product INFOMATION ccccccceseeccceeeccceceececceeececceessseceesueeeceesnsseeeesseecessuseeeeessseseuussssscuusceeacseusasesesaeeeees 284 o Lola MALCIE IE EEE ANER E TAE E TAEA isle sienna Geek idea hia tee 284 Power consumption u ccucciccenceh aan cele TA TR deans sua A AEOS TARSA
260. ppareil a t con u pour fonctionner uniquement avec l antenne fournie L utilisation de toute autre antenne est strictement interdite par la r glementation d Industry Canada En application des r glementations d Industry Canada l utilisation d une antenne de gain sup rieur est strictement interdite Pour emp cher toute interf rence radio au service faisant l objet d une licence cet appareil doit tre utilis a l int rieur et loin des fen tres afin de garantir une protection optimale Si le mat riel ou son antenne d mission est install a l ext rieur il doit faire l objet d une licence L installateur de cet quipement radio doit veiller a ce que l antenne soit implant e et dirig e de mani re n mettre aucun champ HF d passant les limites fix es pour l ensemble de la population par Sant Canada Reportez vous au Code de s curit 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Sant Canada www hc sc gc ca rpb Le terme IC pr c dant le num ro de d accr ditation inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industry Canada Notice to users in the European Union Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for u
261. printer Yes can be monitored and managed remotely using a web browser No Note Yes is the factory default setting WINS Server Address Lets you view or change the current WINS Server Address DNS Server Address Lets you view or change the current DNS Server Address IPv6 menu Use the following menu items to view or set the Internet Protocol version 6 IPv6 information Note This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network lt x gt gt Std Network Setup or Net lt x gt Setup gt IPv6 Menu item Description View Hostname View Address View Router Address Enable DHCPv6 On Off Enable IPv6 Enables IPv6 in the printer On Note On is the factory default setting Off Auto Configuration Specifies whether the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 On address configuration entries provided by a router Off Note On is the factory default setting Lets you view the current setting Note These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Enables DHCPv6 in the printer Note On is the factory default setting Wireless menu Use the following menu items to view or configure the wireless internal print server settings Note This menu is available only for models connected to a wireless network This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Netwo
262. r 88 Cartridge low The toner is low Replace the print cartridge and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 88 yy Cartridge nearly low The toner is low Replace the print cartridge and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 88 yy Replace cartridge The print cartridge is empty 1 Replace the print cartridge 2 Touch Continue to clear the message 200 282 yy paper jam 1 Clear the paper path 2 Touch Continue to continue printing 283 Staple jam 1 Clear the jam from the specified stapler area s 2 Touch Continue to continue printing 290 294 yy scanner jam Clear all original documents from the scanner 293 Replace all originals if restarting job The scanner was instructed to scan using the ADF but there is no paper in the ADF Load paper in the ADF Understanding printer messages Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue if no scan job is active when the attendance message appears This clears the message 240 e Touch Cancel Job if a scan job is processing when the attendance message appears This cancels the job and clears the message e Touch Scan from Automatic Document Feeder if the page jam recovery is active Scanning resumes from the ADF immediately after the last successfully scanned page e Touch Scan from flatbed if page jam recovery is active Scanning resumes from the flatbed immediately after the last successfully scanned page
263. r 80D1877 to be installed on any line which receives metering pulses in Switzerland The filter must be used as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines in Switzerland Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse Cet appareil n cessite l utilisation d un filtre de tonalit de facturation suisse n2 de r f rence Lexmark 80D1877 devant tre install sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse Ce filtre doit tre utilis pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes t l phoniques suisses Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz F r dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zahlzeichenubertragung Lexmark Teilenummer 80D1877 f r jede Leitung installiert werden Uber die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte bertragen werden Die Verwendung des Filters ist obligatorisch da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind Uso del prodotto in Svizzera Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero codice Lexmark 80D1877 da installare su tutte le linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera E necessario utilizzare il filtro poich gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera Notice to Users in the European Union Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and
264. r Custom text and prints them in the specified header or footer location Copying 105 Overlay This option creates a watermark or message that overlays the content of your copy You can choose between Urgent Confidential Copy and Draft or you can enter a custom message in the Enter custom text field The word you pick will appear faintly in large print across each page Note A custom overlay can also be created by your system support person When a custom overlay is created a button with an icon of that overlay will be available Content This option enhances copy quality Choose from Text Text Photo Photograph or Printed Image e Text Use this setting when copying original documents that are mostly text or line art e Text Photo Use this setting when copying original documents that are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures e Photograph Use this setting when copying an original document that is a high quality photograph or inkjet print Printed Image Use this setting when copying halftone photographs documents printed on a laser printer or pages from a magazine or newspaper Advanced Duplex This option controls whether the documents are one sided or two sided what orientation your original documents have and how your documents are bound Note Some Advanced Duplex options may not be available on all printer models Save as Shortcut This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortc
265. r Type setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting e For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog THE TONER IS LOW When 88 Cartridge Low appears order a new print cartridge THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE Replace the print cartridge Print is too dark ES ABC DEF These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DARKNESS BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST SETTINGS The Toner Darkness setting is too dark the Brightness setting is too dark or the Contrast setting is too high From the printer control panel change these settings from the Quality menu For Windows users change these settings from Print Properties e For Macintosh users change these settings from the Print dialog and pop up menus Troubleshooting 279 THE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY Load paper from a fresh package Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it CHECK THE PAPER Avoid textured paper with rough finishes CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting e For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users sp
266. r content is the factory default setting 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened e 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large e This menu item applies to all scan functions E mail images sent as Attachment Web Link Use Multi Page TIFF On Off Specifies how the images will be sent Note Attachment is the factory default setting Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to e mail job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes Onis the factory default setting e This menu item applies to all scan functions Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Specifies whether the transmission log prints Note Print log is the factory default setting Log Paper Source Tray lt x gt Manual Feeder Manual Env MP Feeder Log Output Bin Standard Bin Bin lt x gt Specifies a paper source for printing e mail logs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Specifies an output bin for the printed e mail log E mail Bit Depth 8 bit 1 bit Enables the Text Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Custom Job scanning On Off Lets you copy a document that contains m
267. r has one paper tray loaded with letter size paper A document that contains letter and legal size pages needs to be copied 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Copy Touch Copy from and then touch Mixed Letter Legal Touch Copy to and then touch Letter a uu A U N Touch Copy It The scanner identifies the mixed paper sizes as they scan and then scales the legal size pages to print on letter size paper Copying on both sides of the paper duplexing 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 From the Sides Duplex area touch the button that looks the way you want your copies duplexed The first number represents sides of the original documents the second number represents sides of the copy For example select 1 sided to 2 sided if you have 1 sided original
268. r in order to print from that source Envelope Custom Names menu Menu item Definition Custom Name lt x gt Specify a custom name for a paper type This name replacesa Custom Type lt none gt lt x gt name in the printer menus Understanding printer menus 154 Custom Scan Sizes menu Menu item Description Custom Scan Size lt x gt Specifies a custom scan size name and options This name replaces a Custom Scan Size Name Scan Size lt x gt name in the printer menus Width Notes 3 14 17 inches 76 360 mm e 8 5 Inches is the US factory default setting for Width 216 millimeters is Heigh elent the international factory default setting for Width 3 14 17 inches 76 360 mm f Orient ti n 14 Inches is the US factory default setting for Height 356 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Height Landscape F e Landscape is the factory default setting for Orientation Portrait 2 scans per side Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side Off On ADF Pick Roller Force User Default 30 40 50 60 70 80 User Default is the factory default setting for ADF Pick Roller Force Custom Bin Names menu Description Standard Bin Specifies a custom name for the Standard Bin Bin1 Specifies a custom name for Bin 1 Universal Setup menu These menu items are used to specify the height width and feed direction of the Universal Paper Size
269. ray on page 65 Loading the 2000 sheet tray on page 68 Loading the multipurpose feeder on page 72 Tips on using transparencies Print samples on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities When printing on transparencies Feed transparencies from a 250 sheet tray a 550 sheet tray or the multipurpose feeder Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure transparencies are able to withstand temperatures up to 230 C 446 F without melting discoloring offsetting or releasing hazardous emissions Use transparencies that are 138 146 g m 37 39 Ib bond in weight To prevent print quality problems avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies Before loading transparencies fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together We recommend Lexmark part number 12A5010 for A4 size transparencies and Lexmark part number 70X7240 for letter size transparencies Tips on using envelopes Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities When printing on envelopes Feed envelopes from the multipurpose feeder or the optional envelope feeder Set the Paper Type to Envelope and select the envelope size Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 230 C 446 F without seali
270. ray lt x gt 238 61 Remove defective disk 238 62 Disk full 238 63 Unformatted disk 239 80 Routine maintenance needed 239 840 01 Scanner Disabled 240 841 846 Scanner Service Error 240 88 Cartridge low 239 88 yy Cartridge nearly low 239 88 yy Replace cartridge 239 900 999 Service lt message gt 240 Answering 223 Busy 223 Call complete 223 Change lt src gt to lt x gt 223 Check tray lt x gt connection 223 Close door or insert cartridge 224 Close finisher side door 224 Connect lt x gt bps 224 Dialing 224 Disk corrupted 224 Disk Full Scan Job Canceled 224 Fax failed 224 Fax memory full 225 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator 225 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator 225 Fax Station Name not set up 225 Fax Station Number not set up 225 Flushing buffer 225 Insert staple cartridge 225 Insert Tray lt x gt 226 Install bin lt x gt 226 Install envelope feeder 226 Install tray lt x gt 226 Invalid PIN 226 Job stored for delayed transmission 227 Line busy 227 Load lt src gt with lt x gt 227 Load manual feeder with lt x gt 227 Load staples 227 Memory full cannot print faxes 227 Network 227 Network lt x gt 227 No analog phone line connected to modem fax is disabled 228 No answer 228 No dialtone 228 Queued for sending 228 Ready 228 Reattach bin lt x gt 228 Reattach bin lt x gt lt y gt 229 Reattach envelope feeder 229 Receive complete 229
271. receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it or its original contents are substantially used up depleted or consumed Fuser Units Transfer Transport Units Paper Feed items if any and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed when the printer displays a Life Warning or Scheduled Maintenance message for such item Notices 298 To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase You may be required to deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location You are responsible for loss of or damage to a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part the item replaced becomes the property of the Remarketer or Lexmark The replacement may be a new or repaired item The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced altered in need of a repair not included in warranty service damaged beyond repair or if the product is not free of all legal obligations restrictions liens and encumbrances As part of your warranty service and or replacement Lexmark may update th
272. recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated and certified by UL Underwriter s Laboratories another NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory or a recognized safety certification body in the country region of use This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device including fax machines to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending Notices 292 machine or such business other entity or individual The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowe
273. return to the home screen Copying using the ADF 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Adjust the paper guides 3 Onthe home screen touch Copy or use the keypad to enter the number of copies The copy screen appears Copying 94 4 Change the copy settings as needed 5 Touch Copy It Copying using the scanner glass 1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner 2 Onthe home screen touch Copy or use the keypad to enter the number of copies The copy screen appears 3 Change the copy settings as needed 4 Touch Copy It 5 Ifyou have more pages to scan then place the next document on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the Next Page 6 Touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen Copying photos Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner On the home screen touch Copy Touch Options Touch Content 1 2 3 4 5 Touch Photograph 6 Touch Done 7 Touch Copy It 8 Touch Scan the Next Page or Finish the Job Copying on specialty media Making transparencies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo p
274. ring 246 ADF maintenance kit 248 ADF pick assembly 248 ADF separator roll 248 charge rolls 248 fuser 247 maintenance kit 247 pick rollers 248 staple cartridges 249 transfer roller 248 system board accessing 21 System busy preparing resources for job 232 System busy preparing resources for job Deleting held job s 232 T TCP IP menu 162 telecommunication notices 291 292 293 touch screen buttons 16 transfer roller ordering 248 transparencies loading 72 making 94 tips on using 86 tray linking 76 tray unlinking 76 trays linking 75 76 unlinking 76 troubleshooting checking an unresponsive printer 255 checking an unresponsive scanner 261 solving basic printer problems 255 troubleshooting copy copier does not respond 259 partial document or photo copies 261 Index poor copy quality 260 poor scanned image quality 262 scanner unit does not close 259 troubleshooting display display is blank 255 display shows only diamonds 255 troubleshooting fax blocking junk faxes 117 caller ID is not shown 263 can receive but not send faxes 266 can send but not receive faxes 265 cannot send or receive a fax 264 received fax has poor print quality 266 troubleshooting paper feed message remains after jam is cleared 270 troubleshooting print error reading USB drive 255 held jobs do not print 256 incorrect characters print 257 incorrect margins 274 jammed page does not reprint 270 job prints from wrong tray
275. rint servers Prints a report containing information about configured shortcuts E mail Shortcuts Fax Job Log Prints a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes Fax Call Log Prints a report containing information about the last 100 attempted received and blocked calls Copy Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about copy shortcuts Prints a report containing information about e mail shortcuts Fax Shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about fax shortcuts Prints a report containing information about FTP shortcuts Profiles List Prints a list of profiles stored in the printer NetWare Setup Page Print Fonts S Prints a report containing NetWare specific information about the network settings Note This menu item appears only for printers with an internal print server installed Prints a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in the printer Understanding printer menus 158 Menu item Description Print Directory Prints a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or printer hard disk Notes e Job Buffer Size must be set to 100 The optional flash memory or printer hard disk must be installed correctly and working properly Prints a report containing asset information including the printer serial number and model name The report contains text and UPC barcodes th
276. rinter loses power Understanding printer menus 211 Menu item Description Print Area Sets the logical and physical printable area Normal Notes Whole Page This menu does not appear if Edge to Edge is enabled in the printer Setup menu e Normal is the factory default setting When attempting to print data in the non printable area defined by the Normal setting the printer clips the image at the boundary e The Whole Page setting allows the image to be moved into the non printable area defined by the Normal setting but the printer will clip the image at the Normal setting boundary e The Whole Page setting only affects pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter This setting has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter Download Target Sets the storage location for downloads RAM Notes Flash Disk RAM is the factory default setting e Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk places them in permanent storage Downloads remain in flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the printer is turned off e Storing downloads in RAM is temporary e This menu appears only if a flash and or disk option is installed Job Accounting Specifies whether the printer stores statistical information about On the most recent print jobs on the hard disk Off Notes e Off is the factory default setting Off means the printer does not store job statistics e The statistics inclu
277. rinting Note Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded and then replace the cartridge Recommended print cartridges and part numbers Part name Lexmark Return Program Regular cartridge Cartridge For the US and Canada Print cartridge X651A11A X651A21A High Yield Print Cartridge X651H11A X651H21A Extra High Yield Print Cartridge X654X11A X654X21A High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for Label Applications X651H04A Not applicable Extra High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for Label Applications X654X04A Not applicable For Europe the Middle East and Africa Print cartridge X651A21E X651A11E High Yield Print Cartridge X651H21E X651H11E Extra High Yield Print Cartridge X654X21E X654X11E High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for Label Applications X651HO4E Not applicable Extra High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for Label Applications X654X04E Not applicable For the Asia Pacific Region including Australia and New Zealand Print cartridge X651A21P X651A11P Maintaining the printer 247 Part name Lexmark Return Program Regular cartridge Cartridge X651H21P X654X21P High Yield Print Cartridge X651H11P Extra High Yield Print Cartridge X654X11P High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for Label Applications X651H04P Not applicable Extra High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for Label Applications X654X04P N
278. ription Print Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the current network setup Print NetWare Setup Notes Page x e The Setup Page contains information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address e The NetWare Setup Page menu item appears only on models that support NetWare and shows information about NetWare settings Network Card menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network lt x gt gt Std Network Setup or Net lt x gt Setup gt Network Card Description View Card Status Lets you view the connection status of the Network Card Connected Disconnected View Card Speed Lets you view the speed of a currently active network card Network Address Lets you view the network addresses UAA LAA Understanding printer menus 162 Menu item Description Job Timeout 0 225 seconds Sets the amount of time in seconds that a network print job can take before it is canceled Notes e 90 seconds is the factory default setting e A setting value of 0 disables the timeout e Ifa value of 1 9 is selected then the setting is saved as 10 Banner Page Off On Allows the printer to print a banner page Note Off is the factory default setting TCP IP menu Use the following menu items to view or set the TCP IP information Note This menu is available only for network models
279. rk lt x gt gt Net lt x gt Setup gt Wireless Understanding printer menus 164 Menu item Description Network Mode Specifies the network mode Infrastructure Notes Ad hoc e Infrastructure mode lets the printer access a network using an access point Ad hoc is the factory default setting Ad hoc mode configures the printer for wireless networking directly between it and a computer Compatibility Specifies the wireless standard for the wireless network 802 11n 802 11b g 802 11b g n Choose Network lt list of available networks gt View Signal Quality Lets you select an available network for the printer to use Lets you view the quality of the wireless connection View Security Mode XR Lets you view the encryption method for the wireless connection Disabled indicates that the wireless network is not encrypted AppleTalk menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network lt x gt gt Std Network Setup or Net lt x gt Setup gt AppleTalk Menu item Description Activate Activates AppleTalk support On Note On is the factory default setting Off View Name Shows the assigned AppleTalk name Note The name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server View Address Shows the assigned AppleTalk address Note The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Set Zone Provides a list of AppleTalk zones available on the
280. rt of warranty Above all it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted equipment of a different make or model nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom s network services This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom s 111 Emergency Service This equipment may not provide for the effective hand over of a call to another device connected to the same line Notices 293 This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom s telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment associated with this device The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance to Telecom s specifications There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation and e The equipment shall go on hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another Using this product in Switzerland This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter Lexmark part numbe
281. ry default settings as user default settings A user default setting remains in effect until you access the menu again choose another value and save it To restore the factory default settings see Restoring the factory default settings on page 253 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears 2 On the home screen touch Additional printer setup 40 3 Touch Reports 4 Touch Menu Settings Page The menu settings page prints and the printer returns to the home screen Printing a network setup page If the printer is attached to a network then print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears 2 Onthe home screen touch 3 Touch Reports 4 Touch Network Setup Page The network setup page prints and the printer returns to the home screen 5 Check the first section on the network setup page and confirm that Status is Connected If Status is Not Connected the LAN drop may not be active or the network cable may be malfunctioning Consult a system support person for a solution and then print another network setup page Setting up the printer software Installing the printer software Notes e If you installed the printer software on the computer before but need to reinstall the software then uninstall the current software first e Close all open softw
282. s Eurostile Nebiolo Geneva Apple Computer Inc GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc Helvetica Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation ITC Mona Lisa International Typeface Corporation ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation Joanna The Monotype Corporation plc Marigold Arthur Baker Monaco Apple Computer Inc New York Apple Computer Inc Oxford Arthur Baker Palatino Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Stempel Garamond Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Taffy Agfa Corporation Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc Univers Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries K Notices 286 All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc Licensing notices All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the installation software CD Noise emission levels The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296 Note Some modes may not apply to your product 1 meter average sound pressure dBA Printing 56 dBA Scanning Copying Ready Values are subject to change See www lexmark com for current values Waste fr
283. s either infrastructure or ad hoc e Channel for ad hoc networks The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select e Security Method There are four basic options for Security Method WEP key If your network uses more than one WEP key then enter up to four in the provided spaces Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security The choices are AES or TKIP Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network 802 1X RADIUS If you are installing the printer on an 802 1X network then you may need the following e Authentication type e Inner authentication type e 802 1X user name and password e Certificates No security If your wireless network does not use any type of security then you will not have any security information Note Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended Notes If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to then launch the wireless utility of the computer network adapter and then look for the network name If you cannot find the SSID or the Additional printer setup 4
284. s listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon An FTP destination could also be another PostScript printer for example a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer Scanning to an FTP address Scanning to an FTP address using the keypad 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch FTP 4 Type the FTP address 5 Touch Send It Scanning to an FTP address 123 Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Press and then enter the FTP shortcut number 4 Touch Send It Scanning to an FTP address using the address book 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings
285. s menu the indicated report prints Description Menu Settings Page Prints a report containing information about paper loaded into trays installed memory the total page count alarms timeouts the control panel language the TCP IP address the status of supplies the status of the network connection and other information Understanding printer menus Menu item Device Statistics Network Setup Page 157 Description Prints a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details about printed pages Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address information Note This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected to print servers Network lt x gt Setup Page Wireless Setup Page Shortcut List Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address information Notes e This menu item is available when more than one network option is installed e This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected to print servers Prints a report containing information about the wireless network printer settings such as the TCP IP address information Notes e This menu item is available when a wireless card is installed and Lexmark Document Solutions Suite is enabled e This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected to p
286. s only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system from the printer hard disk All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Manual Wiping overwrites all disk space that has been used to hold data from a print job that has been processed i e printed This type of wipe does not erase any information related to an unprocessed print job Notes This menu item appears only if a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed e Do not start now is the default setting e If the Disk Wiping access control is activated then a user must successfully authenticate and have the required authorization in order to initiate the disk wipe Understanding printer menus 174 Menu item Description Automatic Method Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system Single pass from the printer hard disk All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved Multiple pass such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Notes e This menu item appears only if a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed Single pass is the default setting Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple pass method only Manual Method Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system Single pass from the printer hard disk All permanent data on the printer
287. s turned off 2 Only the standard exit bin supports this size comma YM i oe v v A6t 105 x 148 mm v X 4 1 x 5 8 in ue oe ie y v erk yp v y T v v 7 e a y v aa nl y E T v Statement ara J X J X 1 This size appears in the Paper Size menu only when the paper source does not support size sensing or when size sensing 3This size setting formats the page for 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in unless the size is specified by the software application 4 To support duplexing the Universal width must be between 148 mm 5 8 in and 216 mm 8 5 in Universal length must be between 182 mm 7 2 in and 356 mm 14 in Paper and specialty media guidelines Paper size Universal 4 Dimensions 138 x 210 mm 5 5 x 8 3 in up to 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in 250 or Optional 82 Multipurpose Duplex unit 550 sheet trays 2000 sheet tray feeder standard or optional 70x 127 mm 2 8 x 5 in up to 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in 148 x 182 mm 5 8 x 7 7 in up to 216 x 356mm 8 5 x 14 in 7 3 4 Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm 3 9 x 7 5 in 9 Envelope 98 x 225mm 3 9 x 8 9 in 10 Envelope DL Envelope Other Envelope 105 x 241 mm 4 1 x 9 5 in 110 x 220 mm 4 3 x 8 7 in 98 x 162 mm 3 9 x 6 4 in to 176 x 250 mm 6 9 x 9 8 in is turned off 2 Only the standard exit bin supports this size
288. sabausavascadvegacdsscnsasasedeese 91 Canceling aprint jobannonce a a a a E a a a a aae 92 GO YUN AE E R oo Makne CODES r E a a a a E a aE a E e aaa 93 COPVING PHOTOS setae sneer netere sated a Teta aa eaea aee tea ca ash A aa E ES AEAEE URGANA 94 Copying ON specialty MOGIAL 6 c c00cccccascsedevecencessedesscvacudhecssessseecscuuhaststassesecevunsledi ciadecusvueasdddvetendatsceces 94 CUSTOMIZING COPY Setting S riian innir ennon NAi a NA ARE EINAR E AAE NESANA NEEE EAEE AAE RAS 95 JOD UMTS HU PU sss ces a a e T e Ea NEE aE E EE EO E TENES 101 Placing information ON COPICS c ccccccceccsssssssnsecececescescsseseesseeseeceeeseseseesseneeseeseeesesesssssseceeeeecesaeeseeneesss 101 Canceling a COPY JOD secsisisszecese ssa nash css a E a aa aa aaae ja adesigua eaa aair 102 Understanding the copy screens and OptiOns cccesesesssessceceeeceeseesssnsnsaeeeceeceesseseseseaeeceeeeeeessessnaae es 102 Improving COPY quality meretre kn nrerin A Eer oraes E aaa aE aKT S 105 E mailing dacasncasvansvcnsccdonsnaiacnaaiavessansanveasssensssereersveseeeeesvesiaasenvevesnaimenvemens LOO GELLING ready to eMail scuscssesdcesecssvedesacecatsasedecesossosecudeccnacacoyeucovevase ledacenecaesdladodesesanwaetce decuudnvauannedede s 106 Creating an e mail ShOnteUts enee ices sa thy heen aa eee ih ccd cd doa aaa e a a ens deas eben ee ad 107 E mailing a dO CUMAE cccccseceiedis ce a E naa Sekacecee E A RAE Aa aa AR EEE E aR E EAS arra Ede 108 Cu
289. se Troubleshooting 264 Cannot send or receive a fax These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure if applicable e Telephone e Handset e Answering machine CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK 1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack 2 Listen for a dial tone 3 If you do not hear a dial tone then plug a different telephone into the wall jack 4 If you still do not hear a dial tone then plug a telephone into a different wall jack 5 If you hear a dial tone then connect the printer to that wall jack REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST The fax modem is an analog device Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used e f you are using an ISDN telephone service then connect the printer to an analog telephone port an R interface port on an ISDN terminal adapter For more information and to request an R interface port contact your ISDN provider e f you are using DSL then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use For more information contact your DSL provider e Ifyou are using a PBX telephone service then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX If
290. se within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 Products equipped with 2 4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment CEO Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries but is restricted to indoor use only Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Notices 296 Tower Ill 1095 Budap
291. second time 1 Turn the printer off Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Remove the tray Reattach the tray Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet a uu Bb WN Restart the printer Understanding printer messages 224 If the error occurs again 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the tray 4 Contact Customer Support e Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the tray Close door or insert cartridge The cartridge is missing or not installed correctly Insert the cartridge and close all doors and covers Close finisher side door Close the side door on the finisher Connect lt x gt bps The fax is connected Wait for the message to clear Note lt x gt is the baud rate per second Dialing A fax number is dialed If the number is too long to fit on the screen only the word Dialing appears Wait for the message to clear Disk corrupted The printer attempted a hard disk recovery on a corrupted hard disk and the hard disk cannot be repaired The hard disk must be reformatted Touch Reformat disk to reformat the hard disk and clear the message Note Reformatting the disk deletes all the files currently stored on the disk Disk Full Scan Job Canceled The scan job canceled or stopped due to insufficient printer hard disk space Touch Continue to clear the message Fax failed The fax failed to be sent Wait for the m
292. ss Note If you are entering multiple addresses then separate each address with a comma 6 Select the scan settings Format Content Color and Resolution 7 Enter a shortcut number and then click Add If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number Creating an e mail shortcut using the touch screen 1 Onthe home screen touch E mail 2 Type the recipient s e mail address To create a group of recipients touch Next address and then type the next recipient s e mail address 3 Touch Save as Shortcut 4 Type a unique name for the shortcut and then touch Enter 5 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK If the name or number is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information E mailing 108 E mailing a document Sending an e mail using the touch screen 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Onthe home screen touch E mail 4 Enter the e mail address or shortcut number To enter additional recipients touch Next Address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add 5 Touch E mail It Sending an e
293. ss 12 Scanner ADF Cover Open 231 scanner glass cleaning 242 scanner glass flatbed copying using 94 Scanner Jam Access Cover Open 231 scanning to a computer 127 improving scan quality 130 scanning to a flash drive 128 scanning to an FTP address creating shortcuts using the computer 123 creating shortcuts using the touch screen 124 improving FTP quality 126 using shortcut numbers 123 using the address book 123 using the keypad 122 Securely clearing disk space 231 Security Audit Log menu 174 Sending page lt n gt 231 Serial lt x gt 231 Serial lt x gt menu 169 serial printing setting up 51 Set clock 231 Set Date Time menu 175 setting paper size 64 paper type 64 TCP IP address 162 Universal Paper Size 64 setting up serial printing 51 setting up the printer on an Ethernet network Macintosh only 47 on an Ethernet network Windows only 47 Settings menu 176 Setup menu 210 shipping the printer 250 shortcuts creating e mail 107 fax destination 114 115 FTP destination 123 124 SMTP server not set up Contact system administrator 231 SMTP Setup menu 160 Some held jobs were not restored 232 Standard Network menu 158 standard tray loading 65 Standard USB menu 166 staple cartridges ordering 249 status of supplies checking 245 storing paper 80 supplies 244 307 subject and message information adding to e mail 109 Substitute Size menu 148 supplies conserving 245 status of 245 storing 244 supplies orde
294. ssibilities turn the printer off and then back on This often fixes the problem with the scanner Scan was not successful These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM Turn off and then restart the computer Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING Close all programs not being used THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH Select a lower scan resolution Poor scanned image quality These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY Clean the scanner glass with a clean lint free cloth dampened with water For more information see Cleaning the scanner glass on page 242 ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory Troubleshooting 263 CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Partial document or photo scans These are possible solutions Try one or more o
295. sssssccceeccsssssssssasececeseescsseenseeseeeeeeceeeesssaeeseeeeceseseseeaessusaseaeeeseeeeees 20 Attaching Gablesi ieisesniesivecosscsisavtesdeaddeassthvedossaeasunaadecod cabavdaue deddaeaa ee danesoddedya vax ed aden Aaaa Eara a 38 V riftying Printer SetUD nissenana ccaccasvecsansivssaveccshidesvanstaptdedeatancd EEEE EE 39 Setting up the printer SOFtWALEC cccccssssssccceeceecsssessseseeseccesscessesssaeeecesccecesessaeseeeeeceseseseasasesssnsaaseeees 40 Setting Up Wireless Printing morisien aaae aa a a e a S Sa 42 Installing the printer on an Ethernet Network cccccscsssssscccsccceeccececescesesesesnaeeseseeeeeeeceeeeseesesesesseeeeeees 47 Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions POFt ccccecccecececeeeseeeeeeeess 50 Setting up Serial Printing ssc eet a i seri EE iare EE E aE E Eua aaas 51 Setting UP the printer tO faXcsisu nis aa aa eee eanit Cataceceessbucstsdnaviadssssanaebeatsisenesseebet 53 Loading paper and specialty Meia ccsccsecsscssscsccsccescsscescesscsscesensssO4 Setting the Paper Size ANd Paper TyPe csssscssccceccessssessnseceeceescessssncaseecesecsseesesnsaseseeeseessesesessaeeasansesees 64 Configuring Universal paper SettingS cccccccccssssssssssseeceeceesceseseesessnsaeeeecececeeeessessnsauausaeeeeeeessaeeseeees 64 Loading the standard or optional 250 sheet or 550 sheet tray ccecccccccccssesssessssnsnseseceeceseseesesssessennes 65 Loading the
296. stomizing e mail SettIN GS yi srie a a a a aaan 109 Canceling REA E E E E E EE EEE EE S EE T 110 Understanding e mail Options cccsccscccceccscssssssececceeceessesessenseeecesceesessesseuseeeeeecsssesesesaueeeeeeesseneeeeess 110 FAMINE E A E N T E E D E So a EE Wb E E EE EEA E 113 Creating ShortCUtSi en a a a a a a aa aaa aeai 114 Using shortcuts and the address DOOK ccccsesesessssssnseceeceececessessesesnneceeceecessessesesesaueseeseeeeeeesssseeeeeeess 115 CUSTOMIZING fax SEUEINGS a r aaa a Era e inden aE Ea A rrr a tee yadasbiedsiasesssndniessdiaduaadiescsss 116 Canceling anmoutgoing fakocsi aa a a aa Eea oa ni 118 Understanding fax Options sitseserseweccosi ceva ennn a a a a a Meee a aa 118 Improving FAX QUALIEY c sssccesencecescaesesevcecadedescaensseendadedesctevebeasedscedededsdebsndadencncaedesebandnsercddabanenedeaeadedoes 120 Contents 4 Holding and forwarding faxes ccccccssesssessssssnecececeececescesessesnsaeeeeseeceeceessesesensesaesaeeseeeesessesseeeeeeeeeeses 120 Scanning to an FTP addresSsS seoesoessesecssesecssesessssecscsessesesecsecsesesecssessess L22 Scanning to an FTP AC COSS wet vac cxcsedssvencd che maa a aaa a LAAT a a ds a a eale been 122 Aaa EOT EK eE EE AE E E E TE E E E EA 123 Understanding FTP Options cccccccccssssssssssseceecceessesessssssueaeeceeeeceseeseensneseeeceseessesesessssseeeeseeeseseeeeseesss 124 MPFOVing EL PiG UA ity ss s0ce csr Saeeesvecc
297. t then choose a different fill pattern from your software program or application CHECK THE PAPER TYPE Try a different type of paper e Use only transparencies recommended by the printer manufacturer e Make sure the Paper Type and Paper Texture settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder MAKE SURE THE TONER IS DISTRIBUTED EVENLY IN THE PRINT CARTRIDGE Remove the print cartridge and shake it from side to side to redistribute the toner and then reinstall it THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE OR LOW ON TONER Replace the used print cartridge with a new one Print is too light These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DARKNESS BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST SETTINGS The Toner Darkness setting is too light the Brightness setting is too light or the Contrast setting is too low From the printer control panel change these settings from the Quality menu For Windows users change these settings from Print Properties e For Macintosh users change these settings from the Print dialog and pop up menus 277 Troubleshooting 278 THE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY Load paper from a fresh package Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it CHECK THE PAPER Avoid textured paper with rough finishes CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Pape
298. t job from a computer 92 from the printer control panel 92 card stock loading 72 tips on using 87 Change lt src gt to lt x gt 223 charge rolls ordering 248 Check tray lt x gt connection 223 checking an unresponsive printer 255 checking an unresponsive scanner 261 checking device status on Embedded Web Server 251 cleaning exterior of the printer 242 scanner glass 242 Close door or insert cartridge 224 Close finisher side door 224 collating copies 98 Confidential print jobs 88 printing from Macintosh computer 89 Index printing from Windows 89 Confidential Print menu 172 configuration information wireless network 42 configurations printer 10 Configure MP menu 147 configuring port settings 50 configuring the e mail settings 107 Connect lt x gt bps 224 connecting fax using RJ11 adapter 54 connecting the printer to answering machine 60 computer modem 61 telephone 59 telephone wall jack in Germany 57 conserving supplies 245 contacting customer support 282 control panel printer 13 copy quality adjusting 98 improving 105 copy screen options 102 103 104 Copy Settings menu 183 copy troubleshooting copier does not respond 259 partial document or photo copies 261 poor copy quality 260 poor scanned image quality 262 scanner unit does not close 259 copying adding a date and time stamp 101 adding an overlay message 101 adjusting quality 98 canceling a copy job 102 collating copies 9
299. t needs to be scanned for inclusion in the document Scanning to a computer or flash drive 130 Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document Resolution This option adjusts the output quality of your file Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size Advanced Imaging This option lets you adjust Background Removal Contrast Shadow Detail Sharpness and Color Dropout before you scan the document It also lets you Scan edge to edge as a Mirror Image or as a Negative Image Background Removal Adjusts the white portion of the output Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the white portion Contrast Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the contrast Shadow Detail Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the visible detail in the shadows Sharpness Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the sharpness Color Dropout Color dropout is used for form Optical Character Recognition OCR processing Selecting a color eliminates the color from a form enabling improved OCR capabilities Color Dropout Threshold Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the amount of color dropout Scan edge to edge Select this box to scan edge to edge Mirror Image Select this box to create a mirror image scan
300. t setting e None is not an available selection It appears only when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter e None ignores the Select Paper Feed command e 0 199 allows a custom setting to be assigned Tray Renumber View Factory Def MPF Default 8 T1 Default 1 T2 Default 4 T3 Default 5 T4 Default 20 T5 Default 21 Env Default 6 MPaper Default 2 MEnv Default 3 Lets you view the factory default setting assigned to each tray drawer or feeder even if it has not been installed Tray Renumber Restore Defaults Yes No Returns all tray drawer and feeder assignments to the factory default settings Understanding printer menus HTML menu Menu item Font Name Albertus MT Antique Olive Apple Chancery Arial MT Avant Garde Bodoni Bookman Chicago Clarendon Cooper Black Copperplate Coronet Courier Eurostile Garamond Geneva Gill Sans Goudy Helvetica Hoefler Text Intl CG Times Intl Courier Intl Univers Joanna MT Letter Gothic Lubalin Gothic Marigold MonaLisa Recut Monaco New CenturySbk New York Optima Oxford Palatino StempelGaramond Taffy Times TimesNewRoman Univers Zapf Chancery Description Sets the default font for HTML documents Notes e The Times font will be used in HTML documents that do not specify a font The following fonts appear only if the appropriate DBCS font card is installed HG GothicB MSung Light MD_DotumChe and M
301. t the printer are called held jobs Note Confidential Verify Reserve and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs Job type Confidential Description When you send a Confidential print job to the printer you must create a PIN from the computer The PIN must be four digits using the numbers 0 9 The job is held in printer memory until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel and choose to print or delete the job Verify Reserve Repeat Other types of held jobs include When you send a Verify print job the printer prints one copy and holds the remaining copies in printer memory Verify lets you examine the first copy to see if it is satisfactory before printing the remaining copies Once all copies are printed the job is automatically deleted from printer memory When you send a Reserve print job the printer does not print the job immediately It stores the job in memory so you can print the job later The job is held in memory until you delete it from the Held Jobs menu When you send a Repeat print job the printer prints all requested copies of the job and stores the job in memory so you can print additional copies later You can print additional copies as long as the job remains stored in memory e Profiles from various sources including Lexmark Document Solutions Suite LDSS Forms from a kiosk Bookmarks e Jobs not print
302. t www lexmark com Notes Hi Speed flash drives must support the Full speed standard Flash drives supporting only USB Low speed capabilities are not supported e USB devices must support the FAT File Allocation Tables system Devices formatted with NTFS New Technology File System or any other file system are not supported e If selecting an encrypted pdf file then enter the file password from the printer control panel e Before printing an encrypted pdf file enter the file password from the printer control panel e You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions To print from a flash drive 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears 2 Insert a flash drive into the USB port Notes e f you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention such as when a jam has occurred then the printer ignores the flash drive Printing 91 e If you insert the flash drive while the printer is printing other jobs then Printer Busy appears After the other jobs are processed you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive 3 Touch the document you want to print Note Folders found on the flash drive appear as folders File names are appended by the extension type for example jpg 4 Touch the arrows if you want to increase the number of printed copies 5 Touch Print Note Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished prin
303. t you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays touch Manual Feeder and manually send the paper through the multipurpose feeder When Copy to is set to Auto Size Match each copy matches the size of the original document If a matching paper size is not in one of the trays the printer scales each copy to fit loaded paper Scale This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25 and 400 Scale can also be set for you automatically e When you want to copy from one size of paper to another such as from legal size to letter size paper setting the Copy from and Copy to paper sizes automatically changes the scale to keep all the original document information on your copy Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 1 touch the right arrow to increase the value by 1 e Hold your finger on an arrow to make a continuous increment change e Hold your finger on an arrow for two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document Content This option tells the printer the original document type Choose from Text Text Photo Photograph or Printed Image Text Emphasize sharp black high resolution text against a clean white background e Text Photo Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures e Photograph
304. tacks the print job sequentially Both settings print the entire job the number of times specified by the Copies menu setting Separator Sheets Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted None Notes Between Copies Between Job e None is the factory default setting Between Pages Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collation is set to On If Collation is set to Off a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages such as after all page 1 s and after all page 2 s Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job This setting is useful when printing transparencies or inserting blank pages in a document for notes Separator Source Specifies the paper source for separator sheets Tray lt x gt Notes Multi Purpose Feeder Envelope Feeder e Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default setting From the Paper menu Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for Multi Purpose Feeder to appear as a menu setting N up pages side Specifies that multiple page images be printed on one side of a sheet of paper Off Notes 2 Up 3 Up e Off is the factory default setting 4 Up The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up N up Ordering Specifies the positioning of multiple page images when using N up pages sides Horizonta
305. ted in the product or service Notices 300 The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 IKEv1 implemented in the product or service Index Index Numerics 1565 Emulation error load emulation option 241 2000 sheet tray loading 68 200 282 yy paper jam 239 250 sheet tray standard or optional loading 65 283 Staple jam 239 290 294 yy scanner jam 239 293 Replace all originals if restarting job 239 293 02 Flatbed Cover Open 240 30 Invalid refill change cartridge 232 31 Replace defective cartridge 232 32 Cartridge part number unsupported by device 232 34 Short paper 233 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 233 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 233 37 Insufficient memory to collate job 233 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 233 37 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 233 38 Memory full 234 39 Complex page some data may not have printed 234 42 xy Cartridge region mismatch 234 50 PPDS font error 234 51 Defective flash detected 234 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 235 53 Unformatted flash detected 235 54 Network lt x gt software error 235 54 Serial option lt x gt error 235 54 Standard network software error 235 55 Unsupported option
306. ted paper size Yes Note No is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 217 Menu item Description Annotations Do Not Print Print PostScript menu Menu item Print PS Error On Off Font Priority Resident Flash Disk PCL Emul menu Prints annotations in a PDF Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Description Prints a page containing the PostScript error Note Off is the factory default setting Establishes the font search order Notes Resident is the factory default setting e A formatted flash memory option card or printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available e The flash memory option or printer hard disk cannot be Read Write Write or password protected e Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100 Menu item Description Font Source Specifies the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu item Resident Notes Disk Download Resident is the factory default setting It shows the factory default set of Flash fonts downloaded into printer RAM All e Flash and Disk settings appear only if applicable and show all fonts resident in that option e Flash and Disk options must be properly formatted and cannot be Read Write Write or password protected e Download appears only if applicable and shows all the fonts downloaded into printer RAM e All shows all fonts available to any option Font Nam
307. tement may not apply to you This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in later editions Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time References in this publication to products programs or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates Any reference to a product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products programs or services except those expressly designated by the manufacturer are the user s responsibility For Lexmark technical support visit http support lexmark com For information on supplies and downloads visit www lexmark com 2012 Lexmark International Inc All rights reserved GOVERNMENT END USERS The Software Program and any related documentation are Commercial Items as that term is defined in 48 C F R 2 101 Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation as such terms are used in 48 C F R 12 212 or 48 C F R 227 7202 as applicable Consistent with 48 C F R 12 212 or
308. tes IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side Date Time is the factory default setting for Right side e Off is the factory default setting for Display When Supply Registers Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message to Display The displayed information for Paper Jam Load Paper and Service Errors can be customized with the following options Activate Yes No Type of Message to Display Default Alternate Default Message lt text entry gt Alternate Message lt text entry gt Notes No is the factory default setting for Activate Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message to Display Understanding printer menus Menu item Home screen customization Change Language Copy Copy Shortcuts Fax Fax Shortcuts E mail E mail Shortcuts FTP FTP Shortcuts Search Held Jobs Held Jobs USB Drive Profiles Bookmarks Jobs by user Date Format MM DD YYYY DD MM YYYY YYYY MM DD 179 Description Additional buttons can be added to the Home screen and default buttons can be removed Available selections for each button are Display Do Not Display Formats the printer date Time Format 12 hour A M P M 24 hour clock Formats the printer time Screen Brightness 20 100 Specifies the brightness of the printer control panel screen One Page Copy On Off Sets the copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time Note Off is the f
309. the Embedded Web Server These reports are useful for assessing the status of the printer the network and supplies To view reports from a network printer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Reports and then click the type of report you want to view Adjusting the brightness of the display If you are having trouble reading your display the LCD brightness can be adjusted through the Settings menu 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears On the home screen touch Touch Settings 2 3 4 Touch General Settings 5 Touch the down arrow until Screen Brightness appears 6 Touch the arrows to increase or decrease the brightness Brightness settings can be adjusted from 20 100 100 is the factory default setting N Touch Submit 8 Touch Administrative support 253 Adjusting Power Saver Available settings range from 1 240 minutes The factory default is 30 minutes To increase or decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Power Saver mode do one of the following Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2
310. the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Links amp Index 3 Click Set Date and Time 4 Select Automatically Observe DST 5 Click Submit Loading paper and specialty media 64 Loading paper and specialty media This section explains how to load the 250 500 and 2000 sheet trays and the multipurpose feeder It also includes information about paper orientation setting the Paper Size and Paper Type and linking and unlinking trays Setting the Paper Size and Paper Type The Paper Size setting is determined by the position of the paper guides in the tray for all trays except the multipurpose feeder The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually The factory default Paper Type setting is Plain Paper The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain paper 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears 2 Onthe home screen touch 3 Touch Paper Menu 4 Touch Paper Size Type 5 Touch the arrows for the desired tray until the correct size or type setting appears 6 Touch Submit 7 Touch to return to the home screen Configuring Universal paper settings The Universal Paper Size is a user defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the P
311. the following e To align the ADF front place the Quick Test page faceup short edge first into the ADF e To align the ADF back place the Quick Test page facedown short edge first into the ADF Touch Copy Quick Test The scanner prints a copy of the Quick Test page Touch ADF Front or ADF Back Use the copy of the Quick Test page to adjust the Horizontal Adjust and Top Margin settings Touch Submit Touch Copy Quick Test and compare the new copy to the original Repeat the ADF alignment steps until the position on the page of the Quick Test copy closely matches the original 9 Touch Back 10 Touch Exit Configuration Storing supplies Choose a cool clean storage area for the printer supplies Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them Maintaining the printer 245 Do not expose supplies to e Direct sunlight e Temperatures above 35 C 95 F e High humidity above 80 e Salty air e Corrosive gases e Heavy dust Conserving supplies There are some settings you can change from the printer control panel that will help you conserve toner and paper For more information see Supplies menu Quality menu and Finishing menu If you need to print several copies you can conserve supplies by printing the first copy and checking it for accuracy before printing the remaining copies Checking the status of supplies A message appears on the display when a replaceme
312. the long thumbscrew and turn it clockwise enough to hold the ISP in place but do not tighten the thumbscrew at this time Additional printer setup 31 9 Attach the two provided screws to secure the ISP mounting bracket to the system board cage a jm N A SONTOON NNN t N Q 10 Tighten the long thumbscrew Note Do not overtighten the thumbscrew 11 Insert the plug of the ISP interface cable into the receptacle of the system board Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded 12 Ifa printer hard disk was previously installed then attach the printer hard disk to the ISP For more information see Installing a printer hard disk on page 32 Additional printer setup 32 13 Replace the system board cover and close the system board door Installing a printer hard disk The optional printer hard disk can be installed with or without a Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP Note This operation requires a flathead screwdriver A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily dam
313. ting If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen then you can still print pdf files from the flash drive as held jobs Printing information pages Printing a directory list A directory list shows the resources stored in flash memory or on the printer hard disk 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears 2 Onthe home screen touch 3 Touch Reports 4 Touch the down arrow until Print Directory appears 5 Touch Print Directory Printing the print quality test pages Print the print quality test pages to isolate print quality problems 1 Turn the printer off 2 Hold down and while turning the printer on 3 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears 4 Touch the down arrow until Print Quality Pages appears 5 Touch Print Quality Pages The print quality test pages print 6 Touch Back 7 Touch Exit Configuration Printing 92 Canceling a print job Canceling a print job from the printer control panel 1 From the printer control panel touch Cancel Job or press E on the keypad 2 Touch the print job you want to cancel and then touch Delete Selected Jobs Note If you press E on the keypad then touch Resume to return to the home screen Canceling a print job from the computer For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder In Windows 8 From the Search charm type ru
314. ting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Serial Buffer Disabled Auto 3K to lt maximum size allowed gt Job Buffering Off On Auto p S Sets the size of the serial input buffer Notes e Auto is the factory default setting e The Disabled setting turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1 K increments e The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off e To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel USB and network buffers e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing Notes e Off is the factory default setting e The Off setting does not buffer print jobs to the hard disk e The On setting buffers jobs on the printer hard disk e The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Un
315. tinue If not then continue with step 3 Pull down the output bin door or doors Remove the jammed paper Close the output bin door or doors Touch Continue 280 282 paper jams 1 2 3 4 5 Touch Status Supplies to identify the location of the jam Pull down the StapleSmart finisher door Remove the jammed paper Close the StapleSmart finisher door Touch Continue Clearing jams 139 283 staple jams 1 Touch Status Supplies to identify the location of the jam 2 Press the latch to open the stapler door 3 Pull the latch of the staple cartridge holder down and then pull the holder out of the printer Clearing jams 140 4 Use the metal tab to lift the staple guard and then remove any loose staples 5 Close the staple guard 6 Press down on the staple guard until it snaps into place Clearing jams 141 7 Push the cartridge holder firmly back into the stapler unit until the cartridge holder clicks into place 8 Close the stapler door 290 294 paper jams 1 Remove all original documents from the ADF 2 Open the ADF cover and then remove any jammed paper 3 Close the ADF cover 4 Open the scanner cover and then remove any jammed pages Clearing jams 142 5 Open the bottom ADF door and then remove any jammed pages 6 Close the bottom ADF door and scanner cover 7 Touch Restart Job Understanding printer menus Understanding printer menus Menus list
316. tment or replacement Isolating print quality problems To help isolate print quality problems print the print quality test pages 1 Turn the printer off 2 Load Letter or A4 size paper in the tray 3 Hold down and while turning the printer on 4 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears ul Touch the down arrow until Print Quality Pages appears 6 Touch Print Quality Pages The print quality test pages print 7 Touch Back 8 Touch Exit Configuration Blank pages These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following PACKING MATERIAL MAY BE ON THE PRINT CARTRIDGE Remove the print cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed Reinstall the print cartridge THE TONER MAY BE LOW When 88 Cartridge low appears order a new print cartridge If the problem continues the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact Customer Support Troubleshooting 272 Characters have jagged or uneven edges These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PRINT QUALITY SETTINGS e Change the Print Resolution setting in the Quality menu to 600 dpi 1200 Image Q 1200 dpi or 2400 Image Q Enable Enhance Fine Lines in the Quality menu MAKE SURE DOWNLOADED FONTS ARE SUPPORTED If you are using downloaded fonts then verify that the fonts are supported
317. to Applications gt Utilities Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center From the printer list click Add and then click IP Printer Type the scanner IP address in the address field and then click Add e For AppleTalk printing Notes Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10 5 or earlier In Mac OS X version 10 5 a b From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp Fax Click and then navigate to AppleTalk gt select your printer gt Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier a oannt From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center From the printer list click Add Click Default Browser tab gt More Printers From the first pop up menu select AppleTalk Additional printer setup 50 f From the second pop up menu select Local AppleTalk Zone g Select the device from the list and then click Add Note If the scanner does not show up in the list then you may need to add it using the IP address For more information contact your system support person Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port When a new Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP is installed in the printer the printer configurations on computers that access the printer must be updated since the printer will be assigned a new IP address Al
318. tom ADF door Wipe the ADF scanner glass under the ADF door Close the bottom ADF door Wipe the scanner glass flatbed and backing material by moving the cloth or paper towel from side to side Close the scanner cover Adjusting scanner registration Scanner Registration is a process to align the scan area with the paper location To manually adjust the scanner registration 1 A WwW N on Q WwW Turn the printer off Clean the scanner glass and backing material Hold down and while turning the printer on Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears Touch the down arrow until Scanner Manual Registration appears Touch Scanner Manual Registration Touch Print Quick Test to print a registration page Choose the section of the scanner to align Maintaining the printer 244 To align the scanner glass flatbed a gt 0 Qa O Place the Quick Test page facedown on the scanner glass Touch Copy Quick Test The scanner prints a copy of the Quick Test page Touch Flatbed Use the copy of the Quick Test page to adjust the Left Margin and Top Margin settings Touch Submit Touch Copy Quick Test and compare the new copy to the original Repeat the flatbed alignment steps until the position on the page of the Quick Test copy closely matches the original To align the ADF a gt 0 Qa O Do one of
319. tomatically sense paper size The paper size value must be set 1 Appears only if Tray Size Sensing is turned off Note Only installed trays drawers and feeders are listed in this menu Understanding printer menus Menu item MP Feeder Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Envelope Rough Envelope Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Paper Custom Type lt x gt 146 Description Specifies the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder Notes From the Paper menu Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for MP Feeder Type to appear as a menu item e Plain Paper is the factory default setting Envelope Feeder Size 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope Other Envelope Specifies the envelope size loaded in the envelope feeder Note DL Envelope is the international factory default setting 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting Envelope Feeder Type Envelope Rough Envelope Custom Type lt x gt Manual Paper Size A4 AS A6 JIS B5 Letter Legal Executive Oficio Folio Statement Universal Specifies the type of envelope loaded in the envelope feeder Notes Envelope is the factory default setting The Custom Type setting can be used to store up to six types of envelopes Specifies the size of the paper being manually loaded Note A4 is the international factory def
320. trip on the leading and driver edge and use a non oozing adhesive e Portrait orientation works best especially when printing bar codes Tips on using card stock Card stock is heavy single ply specialty media Many of its variable characteristics such as moisture content thickness and texture can significantly impact print quality Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities When printing on card stock e Feed card stock from a 250 sheet tray a 550 sheet tray or the multipurpose feeder e Make sure the Paper Type is Card Stock Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting Printing 88 Be aware that preprinting perforation and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper handling problems e Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 230 C 446 F without releasing hazardous emissions e Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer Preprinting introduces semi liquid and volatile components into the printer e Use grain short card stock when possible Printing confidential and other held jobs Holding jobs in the printer When sending a job to the printer you can specify that you want the printer to hold the job in memory until you start the job from the printer control panel All print jobs that can be initiated by the user a
321. ts carbon copy forms and documents that contain only text or fine line art When should I use Text Photo mode Use Text Photo mode when faxing an original document that contains a mixture of text and graphics Text Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles business graphics and brochures When should I use Photo mode Use Photo mode when faxing photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or newspaper Holding and forwarding faxes Holding faxes This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Settings Click Fax Settings Click Analog Fax Setup Click Holding Faxes Enter a password in the Print Faxes Password box vn Do WwW A VUN From the Held Fax Mode menu select one of the following e Off e Always On e Manual e Scheduled 8 If you selected Scheduled then continue with the following steps Otherwise go to step 9 a Click Fax Holding Schedule b From the Action menu select Hold faxes c From the Time menu select the time you want the held faxes released d From the Day s menu select the day you want the held faxes released 9 Click Add Faxing 121
322. twork setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section e For more information see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide on the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Checking the device status Using the Embedded Web Server you can view paper tray settings the level of toner in the print cartridge the percentage of life remaining in the maintenance kit and capacity measurements of certain printer parts To view the device status 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Device Status Setting up e mail alerts You can have the printer send you an e mail when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed added or unjammed Administrative support 252 To set up e mail alerts 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Under Other Settings click E mail Alert Setup 4 Select the items for notification and type in the e mail addresses 5 Click Submit Note See your system support person to set up the e mail server Viewing reports You can view some reports from
323. uch the down arrow until Factory Defaults appears 6 Touch the left or right arrow until Restore Now appears 7 Touch Submit 8 Touch Troubleshooting 255 Troubleshooting Solving basic printer problems If there are basic printer problems or the printer is unresponsive make sure The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors uninterrupted power supplies or extension cords Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working The printer is turned on Check the printer power switch The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer print server option or other network device All options are properly installed The printer driver settings are correct Once you have checked each of these possibilities turn the printer off wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on This often fixes the problem Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds The printer self test failed Turn the printer off wait about 10 seconds and then turn the printer on If Ready does not appear then turn the printer off and contact Customer Support Solving printing problems Multiple language PDFs do not print The documents contain unavailable fonts 1 2 3 Open the document you want to print i
324. ut Improving copy quality Tip When should I use Text e Use text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the copy and preserving images mode copied from the original document is not a concern Text mode is recommended for receipts carbon copy forms and documents that contain only text or fine line art When should I use Use Text Photo mode when copying an original document that contains a mixture of text Text Photo mode and graphics e Text Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles business graphics and brochures When should I use Printed Image mode Use Printed Image mode when copying halftone photographs graphics such as documents printed on a laser printer or pages from a magazine or newspaper When should I use Use Photograph mode when the original document is a high quality photograph or inkjet Photograph mode print E mailing E mailing ADF ZU Use the ADF for multiple page documents Scanner glass Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings 106 You can use the printer to e mail scanned documents to one or more recipients There are three ways to send an e mail from the printer You can type the e mail address use a shortcut number or use the address book Getting ready to e mail Setting up the e mail function For
325. w detail setting THE OUTPUT APPEARS WASHED OUT OR OVEREXPOSED On the Copy screen select the Printed Image icon Decrease the background removal setting Partial document or photo copies These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting e For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Solving scanner problems Checking an unresponsive scanner If your scanner is not responding then make sure The printer is turned on 261 The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer print server option or other network device The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker Troubleshooting 262 The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors uninterrupted power supplies or extension cords e Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working Once you have checked each of these po
326. y Note Normal is the factory default setting Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Colored Texture Smooth Normal Rough Light Texture Smooth Normal Rough Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item Heavy Texture Smooth Normal Rough Rough Texture Smooth Normal Rough Description Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Note Rough is the factory default setting Custom lt x gt Texture Smooth Normal Rough Paper Weight menu Specifies the relative texture of the custom paper loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Menu item Description Plain Weight Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Card Stock Weight Specifies the relative weight of the card stock loaded in a specific tray Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Transparency Weight Specifies the relative weight of the p
327. y available during certain hours or when transmission times are cheaper Note If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent the fax is sent the next time the printer is turned on e Advanced Imaging Adjusts Background Removal Contrast Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail and Mirror Image before you fax the document e Custom Job Job Build Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job e Transmission Log Prints the transmission log or transmission error log Scan Preview Displays the image before it is included in the fax When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Edge Erase Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan e Advanced Duplex Controls how many sides and what orientation an original document has and whether original documents are bound along the long edge or the short edge Note Some Advanced Duplex options may not be available on all printer models Faxing 120 Improving fax quality When should I use Text mode Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the fax and preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern Text mode is recommended for faxing receip
328. y default setting for Top middle e All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Understanding printer menus Menu item Header Footer Top right Top right Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Enter custom text Description Specifies header footer information for the top right of the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting for Top right e All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Header Footer Bottom left Bottom left Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Enter custom text Header Footer Bottom middle Bottom middle Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Enter custom text ee A Specifies header footer information for the bottom left of the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting for Bottom left e All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Specifies header footer information for the bottom middle of the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting for Bottom middle e All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Understanding printer menus Menu item Header Footer Bottom right Bottom right Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages
329. y from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching Note If the paper is not easy to remove then open the rear door and remove the paper from there Align and reinstall the print cartridge Close the front cover Close the multipurpose feeder door Touch Continue 202 paper jam Touch Status Supplies to identify the location of the jam If the paper is exiting the printer then pull the paper out and then touch Continue If the paper is not exiting the printer 1 2 Pull down the top rear door Remove the jammed paper 3 Close the top rear door 4 Touch Continue Clearing jams 135 230 239 paper jams 1 Touch Status Supplies to identify the location of the jam 2 Pull the standard tray out 3 Pull down the bottom rear door 4 Push the tab down 5 Remove the jammed paper 6 Close the bottom rear door 7 Insert the standard tray 8 Touch Continue Clearing jams 136 240 249 paper jams 1 Touch Status Supplies to identify the location of the jam 2 Pull the standard tray out 3 Remove any jammed paper and then close the tray 4 Touch Continue 5 Ifthe jam message persists then pull out any optional trays 6 Remove the jammed paper and then insert the trays 7 Touch Continue Clearing jams 137 250 paper jam 1 Touch Status Supplies to identify the location of the jam 2 Remove the paper from the multipurpose feeder 3 Flexth
330. y larger than an equivalent JPEG JPEG Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs XPS Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer Content This option tells the printer the original document type Choose from Text Text Photo or Photo Color can be turned on or off with any of the Content choices Content affects the quality and size of your e mail e Text Emphasizes sharp black high resolution text against a clean white background e Text Photo Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures e Photograph Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures This setting increases the time it takes to scan but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document This increases the amount of information saved Color Sets the scan type and output for the e mail Color documents can be scanned and sent to an e mail address Advanced Options Touching this button opens a screen where you change Advanced Imaging Custom Job Transmission Log Scan Preview Edge Erase and Darkness settings e Advanced Imaging Adjusts Background Removal Contrast Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail and Mirror Image before you copy the document e Custo
331. your system support person Once it is set up it appears as a display item Shows the current printer status such as Ready or Busy e Shows printer conditions such as Toner Low e Shows intervention messages to give instructions on what you should do so the printer can continue processing such as Close door or Insert print cartridge Appears on the display whenever the printer status includes a message requiring intervention Touch it to access the messages screen for more information on the message including how to clear it 7 Tips All menus have a Tips button Tips is a context sensitive Help feature within the display touch screens 8 Fax Opens the Fax menus Other buttons that may appear on the home screen Display item Release Held Faxes Search Held Jobs Held Jobs Function If this button is shown then there are held faxes with a scheduled hold time previously set To access the list of held faxes touch this button Searches on any of the following items and returns search results User names for held or confidential print jobs Job names for held jobs excluding confidential print jobs Profile names Bookmark container or job names USB container or job names for supported extensions only Opens a screen containing all the held jobs Lock Device This button appears on the screen when the printer is unlocked and Device Lockout Personal Identification Number PIN has been set T
332. ypes and weights The paper capacity of each output bin is listed in parentheses Paper capacity estimations are calculated based on 75 g m 20 Ib paper The Finisher supports 60 176 g m 16 47 Ib paper weights Paper and specialty media guidelines Paper type Finisher standard bin 250 or 550 sheets Paper e Plain Bond e Colored e Custom Letterhead e Light e Heavy Preprinted Rough Cotton e Recycled 84 Output Expander 550 5 Bin Mailbox StapleSmart Finisher sheets or High 500 sheets 500 sheets Capacity Output Stacker 1850 sheets v v Card stock V Envelopes Labels e Paper e Vinyl Transparencies 1 Supports 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib paper weights 2 Maximum of 50 sheets per stapled packet special cartridge required for label applications 3 Printing labels requires a special label fuser cleaner which prevents duplexing The label fuser cleaner is included with the Printing 85 Printing This chapter covers printing printer reports and job cancelation Selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print For more information see Avoiding jams on page 131 and Storing paper on page 80 Printing a document 1 Load paper into a tray or feeder 2 From the printer control panel Paper menu set the Paper Type and Paper Size to match the loaded paper 3 Do one of the
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
和泉市立青少年の家・槇尾山森林浴コース(PDF Impostazione ora e data - EUROtronic Technology GmbH Aeon Labs Smart Energy Switch 3 T100 Instrument Handbook Manuel d`utilisation 取扱説明書 the Storm3 FFH User Manual Welcome to Aircon -2 User Manual installation and start-up instructions Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file